Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisPraise for the first edition: This excellent text will be useful to every system engineer (SE) regardless of the domain.It covers ALL relevant SE material and does so in a very clear, methodical fashion.The breadth and depth of the author''s presentation of SE principles and practices is outstanding.Philip Allen This textbook presents a comprehensive, step-by-step guide to System Engineering analysis, design, and development via an integrated set of concepts, principles, practices, and methodologies. The methods presented in this text apply to any type of human system -- small, medium, and large organizational systems and system development projects delivering engineered systems or services across multiple business sectors such as medical, transportation, financial, educational, governmental, aerospace and defense, utilities, political, and charity, among others. Provides a common focal point for bridging the gap between and unifying SyTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface to The Second Edition xvii About The Companion Website xxi Introduction—How to Use This Text xxiii 1 Systems Engineering and Systems Engineering 1 1.1 Definitions of Key Terms 2 1.2 Approach to this Chapter 2 1.3 What is a System? 3 1.4 Learning to Recognize Types of Systems 7 1.5 What is SE? 8 1.6 System Versus Systems Engineering 12 1.7 SE: Historical Notes 13 1.8 Systems Thinking and SE 13 1.9 Chapter Summary 15 1.10 Chapter Exercises 15 1.11 References 16 2 The Evolving State of SE Practice-Challenges and Opportunities 17 2.1 Definitions of Key Terms 19 2.2 Approach to this Chapter 20 2.3 The State of SE and System Development Performance 20 2.4 Understanding the Problem: Root Cause Analysis 24 2.5 Industry Government Academic Professional and Standards Organizations Solutions 27 2.6 Defining the Problem 32 2.7 Engineering Education Challenges and Opportunities 42 2.8 Chapter Summary 43 2.9 Chapter Exercises 46 2.10 References 46 Part I System Engineering and Analysis Concepts 49 3 System Attributes Properties and Characteristics 51 3.1 Definition of Key Terms 51 3.2 Analytical Representation of a System 53 3.3 System Stakeholders: User and End User Roles 55 3.4 System Attributes 56 3.5 System Properties 56 3.6 System Characteristics 60 3.7 The System’s State of Equilibrium and the Balance of Power 61 3.8 System/Product Life Cycle Concepts 64 3.9 System Acceptability: Challenges for Achieving Success 71 3.10 Chapter Summary 74 3.11 Chapter Exercises 74 3.12 References 75 4 User Enterprise Roles Missions and System Applications 76 4.1 Definitions of Key Terms 76 4.2 Approach to this Chapter 77 4.3 User Roles and Missions 78 4.4 Understanding and Defining User Missions 83 4.5 Understanding the User’s Problem Opportunity and Solution Spaces 88 4.6 Chapter Summary 97 4.7 Chapter Exercises 97 4.8 References 98 5 User Needs Mission Analysis Use Cases and Scenarios 99 5.1 Definitions of Key Terms 100 5.2 Approach to this Chapter 101 5.3 Commercial/Consumer Product Versus Contract System Development 101 5.4 User Operational Needs Identification 103 5.5 Mission Analysis 107 5.6 Mission Operational Effectiveness 114 5.7 Defining Mission and System UCs and Scenarios 117 5.8 Chapter Summary 127 5.9 Chapter Exercises 127 5.10 References 128 6 System Concepts Formulation and Development 129 6.1 Definitions of Key Terms 129 6.2 Conceptualization of System Operations 131 6.3 The System Operations Model 131 6.4 Formulating and Developing the System Concepts 138 6.5 Chapter Summary 144 6.6 Chapter Exercises 145 6.7 References 145 7 System Command and Control (C2) - Phases Modes and States of Operation 147 7.1 Definitions of Key Terms 148 7.2 Approach to this Chapter 149 7.3 System Phases of Operation 150 7.4 Introduction to System Modes and States 151 7.5 Enterprise Perspective—Engineered System States 154 7.6 Engineering Perspective—Modes and States 157 7.7 Applying Phases Modes and States of Operation 168 7.8 Modes and States Constraints 169 7.9 Chapter Summary 172 7.10 Chapter Exercises 172 7.11 References 173 8 System Levels of Abstraction Semantics and Elements 174 8.1 Definitions of Key Terms 174 8.2 Establishing and Bounding the System’s Context 175 8.3 System Levels of Abstraction and Semantics 176 8.4 System Decomposition Versus Integration Entity Relationships 181 8.5 Logical–Physical Entity Relationship (ER) Concepts 183 8.6 Architectural System Element Concepts 186 8.7 Chapter Summary 196 8.8 Chapter Exercises 196 8.9 References 197 9 Architectural Frameworks of the SOI and Its Operating Environment 198 9.1 Definitions of Key Terms 198 9.2 Approach to this Chapter 199 9.3 Introduction to the SOI Architecture 199 9.4 Understanding the OE Architecture 201 9.5 Other Architectural Frameworks 209 9.6 Understanding The System Threat Environment 209 9.7 SOI Interfaces 211 9.8 Chapter Summary 218 9.9 Chapter Exercises 218 9.10 References 218 10 Modeling Mission System and Enabling System Operations 219 10.1 Definitions of Key Terms 219 10.2 Approach to this Chapter 219 10.3 The System Behavioral Response Model 220 10.4 System Command & Control (C2) Interaction Constructs 221 10.5 Modeling System Control Flow and Data Flow Operations 225 10.6 Modeling Mission System and Enabling System Operations 230 10.7 Modeling an Operational Capability 235 10.8 Nested Operational Cycles 241 10.9 Model-Based Systems Engineering (MBSE) 241 10.10 Chapter Summary 243 10.11 Chapter Exercises 243 10.12 References 243 11 Analytical Problem-Solving and Solution Development Synthesis 245 11.1 Definitions of Key Terms 245 11.2 Part I: System Engineering and Analysis Concepts Synthesis 245 11.3 Shifting to a New Systems Engineering Paradigm 246 11.4 The Four Domain Solutions Methodology 248 11.5 Chapter Summary 251 11.6 References 254 Part II System Engineering and Development Practices 255 12 Introduction to System Development Strategies 257 12.1 Definitions of Key Terms 258 12.2 Approach to this Chapter 259 12.3 System Development Workflow Strategy 260 12.4 Multi-Level Systems Design and Development Strategy 262 12.5 Chapter Summary 268 12.6 Chapter Exercises 268 12.7 References 269 13 System Verification and Validation (V&V) Strategy 270 13.1 Definitions of Key Terms 270 13.2 Approach to this Chapter 272 13.3 System V&V Concepts Overview 275 13.4 System Verification Practices 278 13.5 System Validation Practices 283 13.6 Applying V&V to the System Development Workflow Processes 285 13.7 Independent Verification & Validation (IV&V) 290 13.8 Chapter Summary 291 13.9 Chapter Exercises 292 13.10 References 292 14 The Wasson Systems Engineering Process 293 14.1 Definitions of Key Terms 293 14.2 Approach to this Chapter 294 14.3 Evolution of SE Processes 294 14.4 The Wasson SE Process Model 296 14.5 Wasson SE Process Model Characteristics 306 14.6 Application of the Wasson SE Process Model 310 14.7 The Strength of the Wasson SE Process Model 311 14.8 Chapter Summary 311 14.9 Chapter Exercises 312 14.10 References 312 15 System Development Process Models 313 15.1 Definitions of Key Terms 314 15.2 Introduction to the System Development Models 315 15.3 Waterfall Development Strategy and Model 316 15.4 “V” System Development Strategy and Model 318 15.5 Spiral Development Strategy and Model 322 15.6 Iterative and Incremental Development Model 324 15.7 Evolutionary Development Strategy and Model 325 15.8 Agile Development Strategy and Model 326 15.9 Selection of System Versus Component Development Models 341 15.10 Chapter Summary 342 15.11 Chapter Exercises 342 15.12 References 342 16 System Configuration Identification and Component Selection Strategy 344 16.1 Definitions of Key Terms 345 16.2 Items: Building Blocks of Systems 347 16.3 Understanding Configuration Identification Semantics 347 16.4 Configuration Item (CI) Implementation 352 16.5 Developmental Configuration Baselines 355 16.6 Component Selection and Development 358 16.7 Vendor Product Semantics 359 16.8 Component Selection Methodology 360 16.9 Driving Issues that Influence COTS/NDI Selection 361 16.10 Chapter Summary 363 16.11 Chapter Exercises 363 16.12 References 364 17 System Documentation Strategy 365 17.1 Definitions of Key Terms 366 17.2 Quality System and Engineering Data Records 366 17.3 System Design and Development Data 367 17.4 Data Accession List (DAL) and Data Criteria List (DCL) 368 17.5 SE and Development Documentation Sequencing 369 17.6 Documentation Levels of Formality 370 17.7 Export Control of Sensitive Data and Technology 371 17.8 System Documentation Issues 373 17.9 Chapter Summary 374 17.10 Chapter Exercises 374 17.11 References 375 18 Technical Reviews Strategy 376 18.1 Definitions of Key Terms 376 18.2 Approach to this Chapter 378 18.3 Technical Reviews Overview 378 18.4 Conduct of Technical Reviews 380 18.5 Contract Review Requirements 381 18.6 In-Process Reviews (IPRs) 383 18.7 Contract Technical Reviews 384 18.8 Chapter Summary 395 18.9 Chapter Exercises 395 18.10 References 396 19 System Specification Concepts 397 19.1 Definitions of Key Terms 397 19.2 What is a Specification? 398 19.3 Attributes of a Well-Defined Specification 400 19.4 Types of Specifications 403 19.5 Key Elements of a Specification 405 19.6 Specification Requirements 408 19.7 Chapter Summary 413 19.8 Chapter Exercises 413 19.9 References 414 20 Specification Development Approaches 415 20.1 Definitions of Key Terms 415 20.2 Approach to this Chapter 416 20.3 Introduction to Specification Development 416 20.4 Specification Development Approaches 420 20.5 Special Topics 426 20.6 Specification Reviews 426 20.7 Chapter Summary 428 20.8 Chapter Exercises 428 20.9 Reference 428 21 Requirements Derivation Allocation Flow Down and Traceability 429 21.1 Definitions of Key Terms 429 21.2 Approach to this Chapter 430 21.3 Introduction to Requirements Derivation Allocation Flowdown & Traceability 430 21.4 Requirements Derivation Methods 436 21.5 Requirements Derivation and Allocation Across Entity Boundaries 436 21.6 Requirements Allocation 438 21.7 Requirements Traceability 439 21.8 Technical Performance Measures (TPMs) 442 21.9 Chapter Summary 445 21.10 Chapter Exercises 445 21.11 References 445 22 Requirements Statement Development 446 22.1 Definition of Key Terms 446 22.2 Approach to this Chapter 446 22.3 Introduction to Requirements Statement Development 447 22.4 Preparing the Requirement Statement 449 22.5 Selection of Requirement Verification Methods 453 22.6 Requirements Traceability and Verification Tools 456 22.7 Requirements Statement Development Guidelines 459 22.8 When Does a Requirement Become “Official”? 462 22.9 Chapter Summary 462 22.10 Chapter Exercises 464 22.11 References 464 23 Specification Analysis 465 23.1 Definition of Key Terms 465 23.2 Analyzing Existing Specifications 466 23.3 Specification Assessment Checklist 467 23.4 Specification Analysis Methods 471 23.5 Specification Deficiencies Checklist 472 23.6 Resolution of Specification COI/CTI Issues 476 23.7 Requirements Compliance 477 23.8 Chapter Summary 478 23.9 Chapter Exercises 478 23.10 References 479 24 User-Centered System Design (UCSD) 480 24.1 Definitions of Key Terms 481 24.2 Approach to this Chapter 483 24.3 Introduction to UCSD 484 24.4 Understanding Human Factors (HF) and Ergonomics 493 24.5 Situational Assessment: Areas of Concern 509 24.6 Complex System Development 512 24.7 SE HF and Ergonomics Actions 512 24.8 Chapter Summary 514 24.9 Chapter Exercises 515 24.10 References 515 25 Engineering Standards of Units Coordinate Systems and Conventions 518 25.1 Definitions of Key Terms 518 25.2 Approach to this Chapter 519 25.3 Engineering Standards 520 25.4 Standards for Units Weights and Measures 520 25.5 Coordinate Reference Systems 522 25.6 Defining a System’s Free Body Dynamics 534 25.7 Applying Engineering Standards and Conventions 538 25.8 Engineering Standards and Conventions Lessons Learned 538 25.9 Chapter Summary 540 25.10 Chapter Exercises 540 25.11 References 541 26 System and Entity Architecture Development 542 26.1 Definitions of Key Terms 542 26.2 Approach to this Chapter 543 26.3 Introduction to System Architecture Development 544 26.4 Development of System Architectures 554 26.5 Advanced System Architecture Topics 559 26.6 Chapter Summary 572 26.7 Chapter Exercises 573 26.8 References 574 27 System Interface Definition Analysis Design and Control 575 27.1 Definitions of Key Terms 576 27.2 Approach to this Chapter 576 27.3 Interface Ownership Work Products and Control Concepts 577 27.4 Interface Definition Methodology 583 27.5 Interface Design—Advanced Topics 588 27.6 Interface Definition and Control Challenges and Solutions 592 27.7 Chapter Summary 597 27.8 Chapter Exercises 598 27.9 References 598 28 System Integration Test and Evaluation (SITE) 599 28.1 Definitions of Key Terms 599 28.2 SITE Fundamentals 601 28.3 Key Elements of Site 604 28.4 Planning for Site 610 28.5 Establishing the Test Organization 612 28.6 Developing Test Cases (TCs) and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) 613 28.7 Performing SITE Tasks 614 28.8 Common Integration and Test Challenges and Issues 617 28.9 Chapter Summary 621 28.10 Chapter Exercises 621 28.11 References 622 29 System Deployment OM&S Retirement and Disposal 623 29.1 Definitions of Key Terms 624 29.2 Approach to this Chapter 625 29.3 System Deployment Operations 626 29.4 System Operation Maintenance & Sustainment (OM&S) 638 29.5 System Retirement (Phase-Out) Operations 645 29.6 System Disposal Operations 646 29.7 Chapter Summary 646 29.8 Chapter Exercises 646 29.9 References 647 Part III Analytical Decision Support Practices 649 30 Introduction to Analytical Decision Support 651 30.1 Definitions of Key Terms 651 30.2 What is Analytical Decision Support? 652 30.3 Attributes of Technical Decisions 652 30.4 Types of Engineering Analyses 654 30.5 System Performance Analysis and Evaluation 654 30.6 Statistical Influences on System Design 659 30.7 Chapter Summary 664 30.8 General Exercises 665 30.9 References 665 31 System Performance Analysis Budgets and Safety Margins 666 31.1 Definitions of Key Terms 667 31.2 Performance “Design-To” Budgets and Safety Margins 667 31.3 Analyzing System Performance 672 31.4 Real-Time Control and Frame-Based Systems 679 31.5 System Performance Optimization 679 31.6 System Analysis Reporting 680 31.7 Chapter Summary 680 31.8 Chapter Exercises 680 31.9 References 681 32 Trade Study Analysis of Alternatives (AoA) 682 32.1 Definitions of Key Terms 682 32.2 Introduction to Multivariate Analysis of Alternatives (AoA) 683 32.3 Chartering a Trade Study 688 32.4 Establishing the Trade Study Methodology 689 32.5 Trade Study Quantitative Approaches 690 32.6 Trade Study Utility or Scoring Functions 695 32.7 Sensitivity Analysis 696 32.8 Trade Study Reports (TSRs) 696 32.9 Trade Study Decision 697 32.10 Trade Study Risk Areas 699 32.11 Trade Study Lessons Learned 701 32.12 Chapter Summary 701 32.13 Chapter Exercises 701 32.14 References 701 33 System Modeling and Simulation (M&S) 703 33.1 Definitions of Key Terms 704 33.2 Technical Decision-Making Aids 705 33.3 Simulation-Based Models 705 33.4 Application Examples of M&S 709 33.5 M&S Challenges and Issues 717 33.6 Chapter Summary 719 33.7 Chapter Exercises 719 33.8 References 720 34 System Reliability Maintainability and Availability (RMA) 721 34.1 Definitions of Key Terms 722 34.2 Approach to this Chapter 723 34.3 System Reliability 725 34.4 Understanding System Maintainability 768 34.5 System Availability 779 34.6 Optimizing RMA Trade-Offs 781 34.7 Reliability-Centered Maintenance (RCM) 783 34.8 System RMA Challenges 788 34.9 Chapter Summary 789 34.10 Chapter Exercises 789 34.11 References 790 Epilog 792 Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations 795 Appendix B INCOSE Handbook Traceability 801 Appendix C System Modeling Language (SysML™) Constructs 811 Index 821

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to technical details related to the Physical Layer of the LTE standard with MATLAB(R) The LTE (Long Term Evolution) and LTE-Advanced are among the latest mobile communications standards, designed to realize the dream of a truly global, fast, all-IP-based, secure broadband mobile access technology.Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Quick Overview of Wireless Standards 1 1.2 Historical Profile of Data Rates 4 1.3 IMT-Advanced Requirements 4 1.4 3GPP and LTE Standardization 5 1.5 LTE Requirements 5 1.6 Theoretical Strategies 6 1.7 LTE-Enabling Technologies 7 1.8 LTE Physical Layer (PHY) Modeling 9 1.9 LTE (Releases 8 and 9) 11 1.10 LTE-Advanced (Release 10) 11 1.11 MATLAB® and Wireless System Design 11 1.12 Organization of This Book 11 References 12 2 Overview of the LTE Physical Layer 13 2.1 Air Interface 13 2.2 Frequency Bands 14 2.3 Unicast and Multicast Services 14 2.4 Allocation of Bandwidth 16 2.5 Time Framing 17 2.6 Time–Frequency Representation 17 2.7 OFDM Multicarrier Transmission 20 2.8 Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiplexing 23 2.9 Resource Grid Content 24 2.10 Physical Channels 25 2.11 Physical Signals 31 2.12 Downlink Frame Structures 34 2.13 Uplink Frame Structures 35 2.14 MIMO 35 2.15 MIMO Modes 40 2.16 PHY Processing 41 2.17 Downlink Processing 41 2.18 Uplink Processing 43 2.19 Chapter Summary 45 References 46 3 MATLAB® for Communications System Design 47 3.1 System Development Workflow 47 3.2 Challenges and Capabilities 48 3.3 Focus 49 3.4 Approach 49 3.5 PHY Models in MATLAB 49 3.6 MATLAB 49 3.7 MATLAB Toolboxes 50 3.8 Simulink 51 3.9 Modeling and Simulation 52 3.10 Prototyping and Implementation 53 3.11 Introduction to System Objects 54 3.12 MATLAB Channel Coding Examples 60 3.13 Chapter Summary 68 References 69 4 Modulation and Coding 71 4.1 Modulation Schemes of LTE 72 4.2 Bit-Level Scrambling 79 4.3 Channel Coding 85 4.4 Turbo Coding 85 4.5 Early-Termination Mechanism 93 4.6 Rate Matching 99 4.7 Codeblock Segmentation 105 4.8 LTE Transport-Channel Processing 107 4.9 Chapter Summary 112 References 113 5 OFDM 115 5.1 Channel Modeling 115 Examples 117 5.2 Scope 121 5.3 Workflow 121 5.4 OFDM and Multipath Fading 122 5.5 OFDM and Channel-Response Estimation 123 5.6 Frequency-Domain Equalization 124 5.7 LTE Resource Grid 124 5.8 Configuring the Resource Grid 125 5.9 Generating Reference Signals 130 5.10 Resource Element Mapping 132 5.11 OFDM Signal Generation 136 5.12 Channel Modeling 137 5.13 OFDM Receiver 140 5.14 Resource Element Demapping 141 5.15 Channel Estimation 143 5.16 Equalizer Gain Computation 145 5.17 Visualizing the Channel 146 5.18 Downlink Transmission Mode 1 147 5.19 Chapter Summary 164 References 165 6 MIMO 167 6.1 Definition of MIMO 167 6.2 Motivation for MIMO 168 6.3 Types of MIMO 168 6.4 Scope of MIMO Coverage 170 6.5 MIMO Channels 170 Implementation 171 6.6 Common MIMO Features 178 6.7 Specific MIMO Features 197 6.8 Chapter Summary 260 References 262 7 Link Adaptation 263 7.1 System Model 264 7.2 Link Adaptation in LTE 265 7.3 MATLAB® Examples 266 7.4 Link Adaptations between Subframes 275 7.5 Adaptive Modulation 277 7.6 Adaptive Modulation and Coding Rate 283 7.7 Adaptive Precoding 287 7.8 Adaptive MIMO 291 7.9 Downlink Control Information 294 7.10 Chapter Summary 302 References 303 8 System-Level Specification 305 8.1 System Model 306 8.2 System Model in MATLAB 315 8.3 Quantitative Assessments 316 8.4 Throughput Analysis 325 8.5 System Model in Simulink 326 8.6 Qualitative Assessment 349 8.7 Chapter Summary 351 References 352 9 Simulation 353 9.1 Speeding Up Simulations in MATLAB 353 9.2 Workflow 354 9.3 Case Study: LTE PDCCH Processing 355 9.4 Baseline Algorithm 356 9.5 MATLAB Code Profiling 358 9.6 MATLAB Code Optimizations 360 9.7 Using Acceleration Features 383 9.8 Using a Simulink Model 387 9.9 GPU Processing 399 9.10 Case Study: Turbo Coders on GPU 406 9.11 Chapter Summary 419 10 Prototyping as C/C++ Code 421 10.1 Use Cases 422 10.2 Motivations 422 10.3 Requirements 422 10.4 MATLAB Code Considerations 423 10.5 How to Generate Code 423 10.6 Structure of the Generated C Code 429 10.7 Supported MATLAB Subset 432 10.8 Complex Numbers and Native C Types 436 10.9 Support for System Toolboxes 438 10.10 Support for Fixed-Point Data 444 10.11 Support for Variable-Sized Data 447 10.12 Integration with Existing C/C++ Code 458 10.13 Chapter Summary 471 References 471 11 Summary 473 11.1 Modeling 473 11.2 Simulation 476 11.3 Directions for Future Work 477 11.4 Concluding Remarks 480 Index 483

Read more less

Book SynopsisEmerging Nanoelectronic Devices focuses on the future direction of semiconductor and emerging nanoscale device technology.Table of ContentsPreface xix List of Contributors xxi Acronyms xxiii PART ONE INTRODUCTION 1 1 The Nanoelectronics Roadmap 3 James Hutchby 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Technology Scaling: Impact and Issues 4 1.3 Technology Scaling: Scaling Limits of Charge-based Devices 4 1.4 The International Technology Roadmap for Semiconductors 6 1.5 ITRS Emerging Research Devices International Technology Working Group 7 1.6 Guiding Performance Criteria 8 1.7 Selection of Nanodevices as Technology Entries 13 1.8 Perspectives 13 References 14 2 What Constitutes a Nanoswitch? A Perspective 15 Supriyo Datta, Vinh Quang Diep, and Behtash Behin-Aein 2.1 The Search for a Better Switch 15 2.2 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Switch: Why it Shows Gain 17 2.3 Switch Based on Magnetic Tunnel Junctions: Would it Show Gain? 20 2.4 Giant Spin Hall Effect: A Route to Gain 23 2.5 Other Possibilities for Switches with Gain 27 2.6 What do Alternative Switches Have to Offer? 29 2.7 Perspective 32 2.8 Summary 32 Acknowledgments 32 References 33 PART TWO NANOELECTRONIC MEMORIES 35 3 Memory Technologies: Status and Perspectives 37 Victor V. Zhirnov and Matthew J. Marinella 3.1 Introduction: Baseline Memory Technologies 37 3.2 Essential Physics of Charge-based Memory 38 3.3 Dynamic Random Access Memory 39 3.4 Flash Memory 43 3.5 Static Random Access Memory 49 3.6 Summary and Perspective 52 Appendix: Memory Array Interconnects 52 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 4 Spin Transfer Torque Random Access Memory 56 Jian-Ping Wang, Mahdi Jamali, Angeline Klemm, and Hao Meng 4.1 Chapter Overview 56 4.2 Spin Transfer Torque 57 4.3 STT-RAM Operation 60 4.4 STT-RAM with Perpendicular Anisotropy 63 4.5 Stack and Material Engineering for Jc Reduction 66 4.6 Ultra-Fast Switching of MTJs 71 4.7 Spin–Orbit Torques for Memory Application 72 4.8 Current Demonstrations for STT-RAM 73 4.9 Summary and Perspectives 73 References 74 5 Phase Change Memory 78 Rakesh Jeyasingh, Ethan C. Ahn, S. Burc Eryilmaz, Scott Fong, and H.-S. Philip Wong 5.1 Introduction 78 5.2 Device Operation 79 5.3 Material Properties 80 5.4 Device and Material Scaling to the Nanometer Size 88 5.5 Multi-Bit Operation and 3D Integration 93 5.6 Applications 97 5.7 Future Outlook 100 5.8 Summary 103 Acknowledgments 103 References 103 6 Ferroelectric FET Memory 110 Ken Takeuchi and An Chen 6.1 Introduction 110 6.2 Ferroelectric FET for Flash Memory Application 111 6.3 Ferroelectric FET for SRAM Application 115 6.4 System Consideration: SSD System with Fe-NAND Flash Memory 118 6.5 Perspectives and Summary 119 References 120 7 Nano-Electro-Mechanical (NEM) Memory Devices 123 Adrian M. Ionescu 7.1 Introduction and Rationale for a Memory Based on NEM Switch 123 7.2 NEM Relay and Capacitor Memories 126 7.3 NEM-FET Memory 130 7.4 Carbon-based NEM Memories 132 7.5 Opportunities and Challenges for NEM Memories 133 References 135 8 Redox-based Resistive Memory 137 Stephan Menzel, Eike Linn, and Rainer Waser 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Physical Fundamentals of Redox Memories 139 8.3 Electrochemical Metallization Memory Cells 144 8.4 Valence Change Memory Cells 149 8.5 Performance 154 8.6 Summary 158 References 158 9 Electronic Effect Resistive Switching Memories 162 An Chen 9.1 Introduction 162 9.2 Charge Injection and Trapping 164 9.3 Mott Transition 167 9.4 Ferroelectric Resistive Switching 170 9.5 Perspectives 173 9.6 Summary 176 References 176 10 Macromolecular Memory 181 Benjamin F. Bory and Stefan C.J. Meskers 10.1 Chapter Overview 181 10.2 Macromolecules 181 10.3 Elementary Physical Chemistry of Macromolecular Memory 184 10.4 Classes of Macromolecular Memory Materials and Their Performance 187 10.5 Perspectives 190 10.6 Summary 190 Acknowledgments 190 References 191 11 Molecular Transistors 194 Mark A. Reed, Hyunwook Song, and Takhee Lee 11.1 Introduction 194 11.2 Experimental Approaches 194 11.3 Molecular Transistors 213 11.4 Molecular Design 218 11.5 Perspectives 222 Acknowledgments 223 References 223 12 Memory Select Devices 227 An Chen 12.1 Introduction 227 12.2 Crossbar Array and Memory Select Devices 227 12.3 Memory Select Device Options 230 12.4 Challenges of Memory Select Devices 241 12.5 Summary 242 References 242 13 Emerging Memory Devices: Assessment and Benchmarking 246 Matthew J. Marinella and Victor V. Zhirnov 13.1 Introduction 246 13.2 Common Emerging Memory Terminology and Metrics 248 13.3 Redox RAM 249 13.4 Emerging Ferroelectric Memories 254 13.5 Mott Memory 258 13.6 Macromolecular Memory 259 13.7 Carbon-based Resistive Switching Memory 260 13.8 Molecular Memory 262 13.9 Assessment and Benchmarking 263 13.10 Summary and Conclusions 271 Acknowledgments 271 References 271 PART THREE NANOELECTRONIC LOGIC AND INFORMATION PROCESSING 277 14 Re-Invention of FET 279 Toshiro Hiramoto 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Historical and Future Trend of MOSFETs 279 14.3 Near-term Solutions 282 14.4 Long-term Solutions 285 14.5 Summary 295 References 296 15 Graphene Electronics 298 Frank Schwierz 15.1 Introduction 298 15.2 Properties of Graphene 300 15.3 Graphene MOSFETs for Mainstream Logic and RF Applications 303 15.4 Graphene MOSFETs for Nonmainstream Applications 308 15.5 Graphene NonMOSFET Transistors 309 15.6 Perspectives 310 Acknowledgment 311 References 311 16 Carbon Nanotube Electronics 315 Aaron D. Franklin 16.1 Carbon Nanotubes – The Ideal Transistor Channel 315 16.2 Operation of the CNTFET 319 16.3 Important Aspects of CNTFETs 320 16.4 Scaling CNTFETs to the Sub-10 Nanometer Regime 324 16.5 Material Considerations 327 16.6 Perspective 329 16.7 Conclusion 331 References 331 17 Spintronics 336 Alexander Khitun 17.1 Introduction 336 17.2 Spin Transistors 337 17.3 Magnetic Logic Circuits 348 17.4 Summary 364 References 365 18 NEMS Switch Technology 370 Louis Hutin and Tsu-Jae King Liu 18.1 Electromechanical Switches for Digital Logic 370 18.2 Actuation Mechanisms 373 18.3 Electrostatic Switch Designs 379 18.4 Reliability and Scalability 383 References 386 19 Atomic Switch 390 Tsuyoshi Hasegawa and Masakazu Aono 19.1 Chapter Overview 390 19.2 Historical Background of the Atomic Switch 390 19.3 Fundamentals of Atomic Switches 391 19.4 Various Atomic Switches 395 19.5 Perspectives 401 References 402 20 ITRS Assessment and Benchmarking of Emerging Logic Devices 405 Shamik Das 20.1 Introduction 405 20.2 Overview of the ITRS Roadmap for Emerging Research Logic Devices 406 20.3 Recent Results for Selected Emerging Devices 407 20.4 Perspective 412 20.5 Summary 413 Acknowledgments 413 References 413 PART FOUR CONCEPTS FOR EMERGING ARCHITECTURES 417 21 Nanomagnet Logic: A Magnetic Implementation of Quantum-dot Cellular Automata 419 Michael T. Niemier, György Csaba, and Wolfgang Porod 21.1 Introduction 419 21.2 Technology Background 420 21.3 NML Circuit Design Based on Conventional, Boolean Logic Gates 423 21.4 Alternative Circuit Design Techniques and Architectures 432 21.5 Retrospective, Future Challenges, and Future Research Directions 437 References 439 22 Explorations in Morphic Architectures 443 Tetsuya Asai and Ferdinand Peper 22.1 Introduction 443 22.2 Neuromorphic Architectures 443 22.3 Cellular Automata Architectures 447 22.4 Taxonomy of Computational Ability of Architectures 450 22.5 Summary 452 References 452 23 Design Considerations for a Computational Architecture of Human Cognition 456 Narayan Srinivasa 23.1 Introduction 456 23.2 Features of Biological Computation 457 23.3 Evolution of Behavior as a Basis for Cognitive Architecture Design 460 23.4 Considerations for a Cognitive Architecture 460 23.5 Emergent Cognition 463 23.6 Perspectives 463 References 464 24 Alternative Architectures for NonBoolean Information Processing Systems 467 Yan Fang, Steven P. Levitan, Donald M. Chiarulli, and Denver H. Dash 24.1 Introduction 467 24.2 Hierarchical Associative Memory Models 475 24.3 N-Tree Model 484 24.4 Summary and Conclusion 494 Acknowledgments 496 References 496 25 Storage Class Memory 498 Geoffrey W. Burr and Paul Franzon 25.1 Introduction 498 25.2 Traditional Storage: HDD and Flash Solid-state Drives 499 25.3 What is Storage Class Memory? 499 25.4 Target Specifications for SCM 501 25.5 Device Candidates for SCM 502 25.6 Architectural Issues in SCM 504 25.7 Conclusions 508 References 509 PART FIVE SUMMARY, CONCLUSIONS, AND OUTLOOK FOR NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 511 26 Outlook for Nanoelectronic Devices 513 An Chen, James Hutchby, Victor V. Zhirnov, and George Bourianoff 26.1 Introduction 513 26.2 Quantitative Logic Benchmarking for Beyond CMOS Technologies 514 26.3 Survey-based Critical Assessment of Emerging Devices 518 26.4 Retrospective Assessment of ERD Tracked Technologies 526 References 528 Index 529

Read more less

Book SynopsisReaders are guided step by step through numerous specific problems and challenges, covering all aspects of electrostatics with an emphasis on numerical procedures. The author focuses on practical examples, derives mathematical equations, and addresses common issues with algorithms.Trade Review“The author well organized fundamental theories on electrostatics and also presented numerical examples, in which typical numerical methods, e.g., finite difference method, finite element method, and method of moment, are introduced and demonstrated by Matlab.” (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 October 2014)Table of ContentsPreface xi Introduction xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 A Review of Basic Electrostatics 1 1.1 Charge, Force, and the Electric Field 1 1.2 Electric Flux Density and Gauss’s Law 5 1.3 Conductors 7 1.4 Potential, Gradient, and Capacitance 10 1.5 Energy in the Electric Field 16 1.6 Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations 18 1.7 Dielectric Interfaces 20 1.8 Electric Dipoles 24 1.9 The Case for Approximate Numerical Analysis 27 Problems 29 2 The Uses of Electrostatics 33 2.1 Basic Circuit Theory 33 2.2 Radio Frequency Transmission Lines 41 2.3 Vacuum Tubes and Cathode Ray Tubes 44 2.4 Field Emission and the Scanning Electron Microscope 47 2.5 Electrostatic Force Devices 48 2.6 Gas Discharges and Lighting Devices 49 3 Introduction to the Method of Moments Technique for Electrostatics 51 3.1 Fundamental Equations 51 3.2 A Working Equation Set 55 3.3 The Single-Point Approximation for Off-Diagonal Terms 56 3.4 Exact Solutions for the Diagonal Term and In-Plane Terms 57 3.5 Approximating Li,j 61 Problems 64 4 Examples using the Method of Moments 67 4.1 A First Modeling Program 67 4.2 Input Data File Preparation for the First Modeling Program 68 4.3 Processing the Input Data 71 4.4 Generating the Li,j Array 73 4.5 Solving the System and Examining Some Results 73 4.6 Limits of Resolution 76 4.7 Voltages and Fields 78 4.8 Varying the Geometry 82 Problems 87 5 Symmetries, Images and Dielectrics 89 5.1 Symmetries 89 5.2 Images 90 5.3 Multiple Images and the Symmetric Stripline 95 5.4 Dielectric Interfaces 102 5.5 Two-Dimensional Cross Sections of Uniform Three-Dimensional Structures 108 5.6 Charge Profiles and Current Bunching 113 5.7 Cylinder between Two Planes 116 Problems 121 6 Triangles 123 6.1 Introduction to Triangular Cells 123 6.2 Right Triangles 124 6.3 Calculating Li,i (Self ) Coefficients 125 6.4 Calculating Li,j for i ≠ j 127 6.5 Basic Meshing and Data Formats for Triangular Cell MoM Programs 127 6.6 Using MATLAB to Generate Triangular Meshings 135 6.7 Calculating Voltages 139 6.8 Calculating the Electric Field 141 6.9 Three-Dimensional Structures 143 6.10 Charge Profiles 152 Problems 156 7 Summary and Overview 159 7.1 Where We Were, Where We’re Going 159 8 The Finite Difference Method 163 8.1 Introduction and a Simple Example 163 8.2 Setting Up and Solving a Basic Problem 165 8.3 The Gauss–Seidel (Relaxation) Solution Technique 172 8.4 Charge, Gauss’s Law, and Resolution 175 8.5 Voltages and Fields 177 8.6 Stored Energy and Capacitance 178 Problems 181 9 Refining the Finite Difference Method 183 9.1 Refined Grids 183 9.2 Arbitrary Conductor Shapes 189 9.3 Mixed Dielectric Regions and a New Derivation of the Finite Difference Equation 194 9.4 Example: Structure with a Dielectric Interface 195 9.5 Axisymmetric Cylindrical Coordinates 196 9.6 Symmetry Boundary Condition 205 9.7 Duality, and Upper and Lower Bounds to Solutions for Transmission Lines 207 9.8 Extrapolation 214 9.9 Three-Dimensional Grids 217 Problems 223 10 Multielectrode Systems 227 10.1 Multielectrode Structures 227 10.2 Utilizing Superposition 229 10.3 Utilizing Symmetry 230 10.4 Circuital Relations and a Caveat 230 10.5 Floating Electrodes 232 Problems 234 11 Probabilistic Potential Theory 237 11.1 Random Walks and the Diffusion Equation 237 11.2 Voltage at a Point from Random Walks 239 11.3 Diffusion 246 11.4 Variable-Step-Size Random Walks 249 11.5 Three-Dimensional Structures 260 Problems 261 12 The Finite Element Method (FEM) 265 12.1 Introduction 265 12.2 Solving Laplace’s Equation by Minimizing Stored Energy 266 12.3 A Simple One-Dimensional Example 267 12.4 A Very Simple Finite Element Approximation 271 12.5 Arbitrary Number of Lines Approximation 274 12.6 Mixed Dielectrics 278 12.7 A Quadratic Approximation 279 12.8 A Simple Two-Dimensional FEM Program 282 Problems 287 13 Triangles and Two-Dimensional Unstructured Grids 289 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Aside: The Area of a Triangle 290 13.3 The Coefficient Matrix 291 13.4 A Simple Example 293 13.5 A Two-Dimensional Triangular Mesh Program 296 Problems 300 14 A Zoning System and Some Examples 303 14.1 General Introduction 303 14.2 Introduction to gmsh 304 14.3 Translating the gmsh.msh File 308 14.4 Running the FEM Analysis 319 14.5 More gmsh Features and Examining the Electric Field 320 14.6 Multiple Electrodes 324 Problems 327 15 Some FEM Topics 329 15.1 Symmetries 329 15.2 A Symmetry Example, Including a Two-Sided Capacitance Estimate 330 15.3 Axisymmetric Structures 337 15.4 The Graded-Potential Boundary Condition 348 15.5 Unbounded Regions 352 15.6 Dielectric Materials 364 Problems 371 16 FEM in Three Dimensions 375 16.1 Creating Three-Dimensional Meshes 375 16.2 The FEM Coefficient Matrix in Three Dimensions 384 16.3 Parsing the gmsh Files and Setting Boundary Conditions 386 16.4 Open Boundaries and Cylinders in Space 392 Problems 396 17 Electrostatic Forces 399 17.1 Introduction 399 17.2 Electron Beam Acceleration and Control 400 17.3 The Electrostatic Relay (Switch) 408 17.4 Electrets and Piezoelectricity: An Overview 414 17.5 Points on a Sphere 415 Problems 419 Appendix Interfacing with Other Languages 423 Index 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding full coverage of the basic principles on the subject, Wide Area Power System Monitoring and Control highlights key technologies for monitoring, protection, and control.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii 1 An Introduction On Power System Monitoring 1 1.1 Synchronized Phasor Measurement 2 1.2 Power System Monitoring and Control with Wide-Area Measurements 2 1.3 ICT Architecture Used in Wide-Area Power System Monitoring and Control 4 1.4 Summary 5 References 5 2 Oscillation Dynamics Analysis Based On Phasor Measurements 7 2.1 Oscillation Characteristics in Power Systems 8 2.1.1 Eigenvalue Analysis and Participation Factor 8 2.1.2 Oscillation Characteristics in an Interconnected Power System 9 2.2 An Overview of Oscillation Monitoring Using Phasor Measurements 12 2.2.1 Monitoring of the Japan Power Network 12 2.2.2 Monitoring of the Southeast Asia Power Network 14 2.3 WAMS-Based Interarea Mode Identification 15 2.4 Low-Frequency Oscillation Dynamics 16 2.4.1 Electromechanical Modes Characteristics 16 2.4.2 Oscillation Characteristics Analyses in Southeast Asia Power Network 18 2.5 Summary 24 References 24 3 Small-Signal Stability Assessment 26 3.1 Power System Small-Signal Stability 27 3.2 Oscillation Model Identification Using Phasor Measurements 29 3.2.1 Oscillation Model of the Electromechanical Mode 29 3.2.2 Dominant Mode Identification with Signal Filtering 30 3.3 Small-Signal Stability Assessment of Wide-Area Power System 32 3.3.1 Simulation Study 32 3.3.2 Stability Assessment Based on Phasor Measurements 33 3.3.3 Stability Assessment Based on Frequency Monitoring 38 3.4 Summary 41 References 41 4 Graphical Tools For Stability and Security Assessment 43 4.1 Importance of Graphical Tools in WAMS 43 4.2 Angle–Voltage Deviation Graph 45 4.3 Simulation Results 48 4.3.1 Disturbance in Generation Side 49 4.3.2 Disturbance in Demand Side 50 4.4 Voltage–Frequency Deviation Graph 52 4.4.1 ΔV_ΔF Graph for Contingency Assessment 53 4.4.2 ΔV _ ΔF Graph for Load Shedding Synthesis 56 4.5 Frequency–Angle Deviation Graph 58 4.6 Electromechanical Wave Propagation Graph 60 4.6.1 Wave Propagation 62 4.6.2 Angle Wave and System Configuration 64 4.7 Summary 68 References 68 5 Power System Control: Fundamentals and New Perspectives 70 5.1 Power System Stability and Control 71 5.2 Angle and Voltage Control 73 5.3 Frequency Control 75 5.3.1 Frequency Control Dynamic 77 5.3.2 Operating States and Power Reserves 81 5.4 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 83 5.5 Challenges, Opportunities, and New Perspectives 88 5.5.1 Application of Advanced Control Methods and Technologies 88 5.5.2 Standards Updating 90 5.5.3 Impacts of Renewable Energy Options 90 5.5.4 RESs Contribution to Regulation Services 92 5.6 Summary 94 References 95 6 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Power System Control Design 96 6.1 Measurement-Based Controller Design 97 6.2 Controller Tuning Using a Vibration Model 98 6.2.1 A Vibration Model Including the Effect of Damping Controllers 98 6.2.2 Tuning Mechanism 101 6.2.3 Simulation Results 102 6.3 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Controller Design 107 6.3.1 Wide-Area Power System Identification 107 6.3.2 Design Procedure 110 6.3.3 Simulation Results 110 6.4 Summary 118 References 118 7 Coordinated Dynamic Stability and Voltage Regulation 119 7.1 Need for AVR–PSS Coordination 120 7.2 A Survey on Recent Achievements 123 7.3 A Robust Simultaneous AVR–PSS Synthesis Approach 126 7.3.1 Control Framework 126 7.3.2 Developed Algorithm 128 7.3.3 Real-Time Implementation 131 7.3.4 Experiment Results 132 7.4 A Wide-Area Measurement-Based Coordination Approach 135 7.4.1 High Penetration of Wind Power 136 7.4.2 Developed Algorithm 138 7.4.3 An Application Example 141 7.4.4 Simulation Results 141 7.5 Intelligent AVR and PSS Coordination Design 149 7.5.1 Fuzzy Logic-Based Coordination System 149 7.5.2 Simulation Results 151 7.6 Summary 155 References 155 8 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Emergency Control 158 8.1 Conventional Load Shedding and New Challenges 159 8.1.1 Load Shedding: Concept and Review 159 8.1.2 Some Key Issues 161 8.2 Need for Monitoring Both Voltage and Frequency 162 8.3 Simultaneous Voltage and Frequency-Based LS 165 8.3.1 Proposed LS Scheme 165 8.3.2 Implementation 167 8.3.3 Case Studies and Simulation Results 168 8.3.4 An Approach for Optimal UFVLS 176 8.3.5 Discussion 177 8.4 Wave Propagation-Based Emergency Control 178 8.4.1 Proposed Control Scheme 178 8.4.2 Simulation Results 180 8.5 Summary 183 References 183 9 Microgrid Control: Concepts and Classification 186 9.1 Microgrids 187 9.2 Microgrid Control 192 9.3 Local Controls 195 9.4 Secondary Controls 198 9.5 Global Controls 202 9.6 Central/Emergency Controls 204 9.7 Summary 206 References 207 10 Microgrid Control: Synthesis Examples 209 10.1 Local Control Synthesis 209 10.1.1 Robust Voltage Control Design 209 10.1.2 Intelligent Droop-Based Voltage and Frequency Control 215 10.2 Secondary Control Synthesis 221 10.2.1 Intelligent Frequency Control 221 10.2.2 ANN-Based Self-Tuning Frequency Control 228 10.3 Global Control Synthesis 235 10.3.1 Adaptive Energy Consumption Scheduling 235 10.3.2 Power Dispatching in Interconnected MGs 240 10.4 Emergency Control Synthesis 242 10.4.1 Developed LS Algorithm 243 10.4.2 Case Study and Simulation 243 10.5 Summary 246 References 246 Appendix A New York/New England 16-Machine 68-Bus System Case Study 249 Appendix B Nine-Bus Power System Case Study 254 Appendix C Four-Order Dynamical Power System Model and Parameters of the Four-Machine Infinite-Bus System 256 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents the application of system analysis techniques with case studies to help readers learn how the techniques can be applied, how the problems are solved, and which sustainable management strategies can be reached.Table of ContentsPREFACE xix I FUNDAMENTAL BACKGROUND 1 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 The Concept of Sustainable Development 3 1.2 Sustainability in the Context of SWM 10 1.3 The Framework for Sustainability Assessment 12 1.4 The Structure of this Book 13 References 16 2 TECHNOLOGY MATRIX FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 19 2.1 Waste Classification and Types of Waste 19 2.2 Waste Management Through Waste Hierarchy: Reduce, Reuse, Recycle, Recover, and Disposal 28 2.3 Waste Operational Units: Real-World Cases 34 2.4 Waste Operational Units: Equipment and Facilities 42 2.5 Technology Matrix for Multiple Solid Waste Streams 72 2.6 Final Remarks 90 References 90 3 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC CONCERNS 99 3.1 Financial Concerns 100 3.2 Economic Incentives and Socioeconomic Concerns 114 3.3 Social Concerns 123 3.4 Final Remarks 133 References 134 4 LEGAL AND INSTITUTIONAL CONCERNS 141 4.1 SWM Legislation 141 4.2 Sustainable Waste Management Principles and Policies 151 4.3 Policy Instruments 155 4.4 ISWM Plans 162 4.5 Final Remarks 163 References 163 5 RISK ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF RISK 171 5.1 Formulate the Problem: Inherent Hazards in Solid Waste Management 171 5.2 Risk Assessment in Solid Waste Management 176 5.3 Management of Risk 183 5.4 Risk Communication 184 5.5 How to Promote a Sustainable Solid Waste Management with Risk Analysis? 186 5.6 Final Remarks 188 References 188 II PRINCIPLES OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 193 6 GLOBAL CHANGE, SUSTAINABILITY, AND ADAPTIVE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 195 6.1 Global Change Impacts 195 6.2 Sustainability Considerations and Criteria 208 6.3 Adaptive Management Strategies for Solid Waste Management Systems 208 6.4 Final Remarks 210 References 210 7 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 215 7.1 Systems Engineering Principles 215 7.2 System of Systems Engineering Approaches 222 7.3 Centralized Versus Decentralized Approaches 227 7.4 Sensitivity Analysis and Uncertainty Quantification 230 7.5 Final Remarks 232 References 233 8 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING TOOLS AND METHODS FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 235 8.1 Systems Analysis, Waste Management, and Technology Hub 236 8.2 Cost–Benefit–Risk Trade-Offs and Single-Objective Optimization 240 8.3 Multicriteria Decision-Making 248 8.4 Game Theory and Conflict Resolution 283 8.5 System Dynamics Modeling 287 8.6 Final Remarks 290 References 292 Appendix Web Site Resources of Software Packages of LINDO and LINGO 299 III INDUSTRIAL ECOLOGY AND INTEGRATED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES 301 9 INDUSTRIAL ECOLOGY AND MUNICIPAL UTILITY PARKS 303 9.1 Industrial Symbiosis and Industrial Ecology 303 9.2 Creation of Eco-Industrial Parks and Eco-Industrial Clusters 309 9.3 Municipal Utility Parks in Urban Regions 314 9.4 Final Remarks 319 References 321 10 LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 323 10.1 Life Cycle Assessment for Solid Waste Management 323 10.2 Phases of Life Cycle Assessment 325 10.3 LCA Waste Management Software 355 10.4 Putting LCA into Practice 361 10.5 Life Cycle Management 374 10.6 Final Remarks 376 References 376 11 STREAMLINED LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT FOR SOLID WASTE TREATMENT OPTIONS 387 11.1 Application of Life Cycle Assessment for Solid Waste Management 388 11.2 LCA for Screening Technologies of Solid Waste Treatment 390 11.3 LCA Assessment Methodology 391 11.4 Description of the CSLCA 397 11.5 Interpretation of CSLCA Results 400 11.6 Final Remarks 412 References 412 12 CARBON-FOOTPRINT-BASED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 417 12.1 The Global-Warming Potential Impact 417 12.2 The Quantification Process 418 12.3 GWP Assessment for Solid Waste Management 426 12.4 Case Study 429 12.5 Systems Analysis 434 12.6 Final Remarks 436 References 436 IV INTEGRATED SYSTEMS PLANNING, DESIGN, AND MANAGEMENT 441 13 MULTIOBJECTIVE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT IN A CARBON-REGULATED ENVIRONMENT 443 13.1 Current Gaps of Cost–Benefit Analyses for Solid Waste Management 444 13.2 Background of System Planning 446 13.3 Formulation of Systems Engineering Models for Comparative Analysis 451 13.4 Interpretation of Modeling Output for Decision Analysis 459 13.5 Comparative Analysis 464 13.6 Final Remarks 470 References 470 14 PLANNING REGIONAL MATERIAL RECOVERY FACILITIES IN A FAST-GROWING URBAN REGION 475 14.1 Forecasting Municipal Solid Waste Generation and Optimal Siting of MRF in a Fast-growing Urban Region 476 14.2 Modeling Philosophy 478 14.3 Study Region and System Analysis Framework 480 14.4 Prediction of Solid Waste Generation 483 14.5 Regional Planning of Material Recovery Facilities 492 14.6 Final Remarks 506 References 508 15 OPTIMAL PLANNING FOR SOLID WASTE COLLECTION, RECYCLING, AND VEHICLE ROUTING 515 15.1 Systems Engineering Approaches for Solid Waste Collection 516 15.2 Simulation for Planning Solid Waste Recycling Drop-Off Stations 520 15.3 Multiobjective Programming for Planning Solid Waste Recycling Drop-Off Stations 533 15.4 Final Remarks 543 References 546 16 MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING WITH SUSTAINABILITY CONSIDERATIONS 553 16.1 Deterministic Multiple Attribute Decision-Making Process 554 16.2 MADM for Solid Waste Management 568 16.3 Final Remarks 579 References 580 17 DECISION ANALYSIS FOR OPTIMAL BALANCE BETWEEN SOLID WASTE INCINERATION AND RECYCLING PROGRAMS 585 17.1 Systems Analysis for Integrated Material Recycling and Waste-to-Energy Programs 586 17.2 Refuse-Derived Fuel Process for Solid Waste Management 587 17.3 Regional Shipping Strategies 594 17.4 Final Remarks 606 References 609 18 ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATICS FOR INTEGRATED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 611 18.1 How Does Environmental Informatics Help Solid Waste Management? 611 18.2 Sensors and Sensor Networks for Solid Waste Management 612 18.3 Database Design for Solid Waste Management 615 18.4 Spatial Analysis with GIS and GPS for Solid Waste Management 616 18.5 Expert Systems, Decision Support Systems, and Computational Intelligence Techniques 624 18.6 Integrated Environmental Information Systems 641 18.7 Final Remarks 644 References 646 V UNCERTAINTY ANALYSES AND FUTURE PERSPECTIVES 665 19 STOCHASTIC PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT DECISION-MAKING 667 19.1 Background of Stochastic Programming 667 19.2 Model Formulations of Stochastic Programming 668 19.3 Stochastic Programming with Multiple Objective Functions 682 19.4 Stochastic Dynamic Programming 686 19.5 Game Theory 689 19.6 Final Remarks 698 References 699 20 FUZZY MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WITH SOCIETAL COMPLICATIONS 703 20.1 Fundamentals of Fuzzy Set Theory 703 20.2 Siting a Regional Landfill with Fuzzy Multiattribute Decision-Making and GIS Techniques 713 20.3 Fair Fund Redistribution and Environmental Justice with GIS-based Fuzzy AHP Method 731 20.4 Final Remarks 751 References 753 21 FUZZY MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WITH TECHNOLOGICAL COMPLICATIONS 759 21.1 Integrated Fuzzy Topsis and AHP Method for Screening Solid Waste Recycling Alternatives 759 21.2 The Algorithm of FIMADM Method 765 21.3 The Solid Waste Management System 771 21.4 Final Remarks 788 References 788 22 FUZZY MULTIOBJECTIVE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 791 22.1 Fuzzy Linear Programming 791 22.2 Fuzzy Multiobjective Programming—Fuzzy Global Criterion Method 796 22.3 Fuzzy Goal Programming 800 22.4 Case Study 802 22.5 Final Remarks 823 References 826 23 GREY SYSTEMS THEORY FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 829 23.1 Grey Systems Theory 829 23.2 Grey Linear Programming 831 23.3 The Stability Issues of Grey Programming Models 840 23.4 The Hybrid Approach for Various Cases of Uncertainty Quantification 843 23.5 Final Remarks 844 References 845 24 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS FOR THE FUTURE OF SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT: CHALLENGES AND PERSPECTIVES 849 24.1 The Evolution of Systems Analysis for Solid Waste Management 850 24.2 Trend Analysis 862 24.3 Technical Barriers and Socioeconomic Challenges 869 24.4 Future Perspectives 872 24.5 Final Remarks 874 References 875 INDEX 895

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the study of electromagnetic wave theory and describes how electromagnetic technologies affect our daily lives. From ER to ET: How Electromagnetic Technologies Are Changing Our Lives explores electromagnetic wave theory including its founders, scientific underpinnings, ethical issues, and applications through history. Utilizing a format of short essays, this book explains in a balanced, and direct style how electromagnetictechnologies are changing the world we live in and the future they may create for us. Quizzes at the end of each chapter provide the reader with a deeper understanding of the material. This book is a valuable resource for microwave engineers of varying levels of experience, and for instructors to motivate their students and add depth to their assignments. In addition, this book: Presents topics that investigate all aspects of electromagnetic technology throughout history Explores societal and global issues Table of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHOR ix PREFACE xi 1 ON THE SHOULDERS OF GIANTS 1 1.1 He(a)dy Stuff / 1 1.2 From Russia without English / 3 1.3 On the Shoulders of Giants / 5 1.4 Do-it-yourself Execution? / 8 1.5 Franklin: Did He or Didn’t He? / 10 1.6 De Magnete (“On the Magnet”) / 12 1.7 A Eureka Moment / 15 1.8 Auld Lang Syne / 17 1.9 As Singular as a Delta Function? / 19 1.10 Publish or Perish? / 21 DID YOU KNOW? 24 2 THE EARTH AND BEYOND 27 2.1 In the Eye of the Beholder / 27 2.2 Roses are Red, Violets are Blue… / 30 2.3 2003: An Earth Odyssey? / 32 2.4 Which Came First: Big Bang or Big Crunch? / 34 2.5 Whistling in the Dark? / 36 2.6 Going Beyond a Selfie / 38 DID YOU KNOW? 41 3 SEARCH FOR EXTRATERRESTRIAL INTELLIGENCE (SETI) 45 3.1 Little Green Men: A Phantom Menace? / 45 3.2 Waiting for Godot? / 47 3.3 Is There Anybody There? / 49 3.4 Science or Science Fiction? / 51 DID YOU KNOW? 54 4 PROFESSIONALISM: ETHICS AND LAW 59 4.1 Did Maxwell Pull a Fast One? / 59 4.2 Cell Phones and Cancer: Anatomy of a Legal Opinion / 61 4.3 Happy 200th Anniversary! / 64 4.4 Einstein Doesn’t Work Here Anymore / 66 4.5 It is a Bird. It is a Plane. It is… / 68 DID YOU KNOW? 71 5 HEALTH EFFECTS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS 75 5.1 Say Au Revoir to Cell Phones? / 75 5.2 Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity / 78 5.3 From Bell Tower to Cell Tower / 80 5.4 Nocebo: Reading This Column may Affect Your Health / 83 5.5 Magnetic Pull: Biological Effects or Medical Applications? / 85 5.6 Close Encounters With Radiation of the Other Kind / 88 DID YOU KNOW? 91 6 BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 95 6.1 How Many Biologists Does it Take to Fix a Radio? / 95 6.2 The Grand Challenges / 97 6.3 Biomedical Applications: Taking Stock / 99 6.4 Tugging at the Heartstrings / 101 6.5 A Jolt from the Blue? / 103 6.6 Channeling the Voice Within / 105 6.7 Battling Cancer: Microwave Hyperthermia / 107 DID YOU KNOW? 110 7 DEFENSE APPLICATIONS 113 7.1 Where is Waldo? / 113 7.2 Antimagnet / 115 7.3 Cutting to the Chase / 117 7.4 Twenty-First Century Warfare / 119 7.5 On a Wing and a Prayer / 121 7.6 ELF Communication: An Obituary / 122 7.7 Catching up with Professor Scarry / 124 7.8 Criminal Interference / 126 7.9 Wireless Networks: An Electronic Battlefield? / 130 DID YOU KNOW? 133 8 DOMESTIC AND INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 137 8.1 Blowin’ in the Wind / 137 8.2 Sharing the Road / 139 8.3 Rare no More? / 141 8.4 Local Heating? / 143 8.5 Coming Soon to a Wal-Mart Near You / 145 8.6 Has Your Cat Gone Phishing? / 148 8.7 The Future of Wireless Charging / 150 8.8 Electropollution or Sustainable Energy? / 151 DID YOU KNOW? 154 9 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 157 9.1 Small is Beautiful / 157 9.2 Gigabit Wi-Fi / 159 9.3 Open Spectrum: A Tragedy of the Commons? / 161 9.4 Near-Field Communication / 163 9.5 A New Digital Phone? / 165 9.6 Electronic Countermeasures / 167 DID YOU KNOW? 170 10 LIFELONG LEARNING 175 10.1 Back to Basics / 175 10.2 Preaching to the Choir? / 177 10.3 The Other Davos? / 180 10.4 Mirror, Mirror on the Wall; who is the Fairest of Them All? / 182 10.5 Equations Redux / 184 10.6 New Year’s Resolutions Laws / 185 10.7 Through a Glass Darkly / 187 10.8 Stranger Than Fiction? / 189 10.9 High Frequency Education: What Do You Think? / 191 AFTERWORD 195 INDEX 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith emphasis on the physical and engineering principles, this book provides a comprehensive and highly accessible treatment of modern lasers and optoelectronics. Divided into four parts, it explains laser fundamentals, types of lasers, laser electronics & optoelectronics, and laser applications, covering each of the topics in their entirety, from basic fundamentals to advanced concepts. Key features include: exploration of technological and application-related aspects of lasers and optoelectronics, detailing both existing and emerging applications in industry, medical diagnostics and therapeutics, scientific studies and Defence. simple explanation of the concepts and essential information on electronics and circuitry related to laser systems illustration of numerous solved and unsolved problems, practical examples, chapter summaries, self-evaluation exercises, and a comprehensive list of references for further reading This volume Table of ContentsPreface xix Part I LASER FUNDAMENTALS 1 1 Laser Basics 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Laser Operation 3 1.3 Rules of Quantum Mechanics 3 1.4 Absorption, Spontaneous Emission and Stimulated Emission 4 1.5 Population Inversion 10 1.6 Two-, Three- and Four-Level Laser Systems 11 1.7 Gain of Laser Medium 16 1.8 Laser Resonator 17 1.9 Longitudinal and Transverse Modes 18 1.10 Types of Laser Resonators 21 1.11 Pumping Mechanisms 23 1.12 Summary 29 2 Laser Characteristics 34 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Laser Characteristics 34 2.3 Important Laser Parameters 41 2.4 Measurement of Laser Parameters 49 2.5 Laser Beam Diagnostic Equipment 56 2.6 Summary 59 Part II TYPES OF LASERS 65 3 Solid-state Lasers 67 3.1 Introduction: Types of Laser 67 3.2 Importance of Host Material 67 3.3 Operational Modes 68 3.4 Ruby Lasers 76 3.5 Neodymium-doped Lasers 78 3.6 Erbium-doped Lasers 85 3.7 Vibronic Lasers 88 3.8 Colour Centre Lasers 90 3.9 Fibre Lasers 91 3.10 Summary 101 4 Gas Lasers 105 4.1 Introduction to Gas Lasers 105 4.2 Helium-neon Lasers 107 4.3 Carbon Dioxide Lasers 111 4.4 Metal Vapour Lasers 115 4.5 Rare Gas Ion Lasers 118 4.6 Excimer Lasers 120 4.7 Chemical Lasers 121 4.8 Carbon Dioxide Gas Dynamic Lasers 125 4.9 Dye Laser 125 4.10 Free-electron Lasers 127 4.11 X-Ray Lasers 129 4.12 Summary 129 5 Semiconductor Lasers 132 5.1 Introduction 132 5.2 Operational Basics 132 5.3 Semiconductor Laser Materials 135 5.4 Types of Semiconductor Lasers 136 5.5 Characteristic Parameters 148 5.6 Gain- and Index-guided Diode Lasers 152 5.7 Handling Semiconductor Diode Lasers 152 5.8 Semiconductor Diode Lasers: Application Areas 153 5.9 Summary 154 Part III LASER ELECTRONICS AND OPTOELECTRONICS 159 6 Building Blocks of Laser Electronics 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Linear Power Supplies 161 6.3 Switched-mode Power Supplies 173 6.4 Constant Current Sources 186 6.5 Integrated-circuit Timer Circuits 191 6.6 Current-to-voltage Converter 197 6.7 Peak Detector 199 6.8 High-voltage Trigger Circuit 200 6.9 Summary 202 7 Solid-state Laser Electronics 208 7.1 Introduction 208 7.2 Spectrum of Laser Electronics 208 7.3 Electronics for Solid-state Lasers 213 7.4 Electronics for Pulsed Solid-state Lasers 214 7.5 Electronics for CW Solid-state Lasers 233 7.6 Solid-state Laser Designators and Rangefinders 237 7.7 Summary 238 8 Gas Laser Electronics 242 8.1 Introduction 242 8.2 Gas Discharge Characteristics 242 8.3 Gas Laser Power Supplies 242 8.4 Helium-Neon Laser Power Supply 244 8.5 Carbon Dioxide Laser Power Supplies 257 8.6 Power Supplies for Metal Vapour Lasers 260 8.7 Power Supplies for Excimer Lasers 261 8.8 Power Supplies for Ion Lasers 262 8.9 Frequency Stabilization of Gas Lasers 263 8.10 Summary 267 9 Laser Diode Electronics 271 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 Laser Diode Protection 271 9.3 Operational Modes 276 9.4 Laser Diode Driver Circuits 278 9.5 Laser Diode Temperature Control 291 9.6 Summary 308 10 Optoelectronic Devices and Circuits 315 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Classification of Photosensors 315 10.3 Radiometry and Photometry 316 10.4 Characteristic Parameters 318 10.5 Photoconductors 324 10.6 Photodiodes 329 10.7 Phototransistors 340 10.8 Photo- FET, SCR and TRIAC 343 10.9 Photoemissive Sensors 345 10.10 Thermal Sensors 347 10.11 Displays 349 10.12 Light-emitting Diodes 351 10.13 Liquid-crystal Displays 356 10.14 Cathode Ray Tube Displays 361 10.15 Emerging Display Technologies 362 10.16 Optocouplers 363 10.17 Summary 370 Part IV LASER APPLICATIONS 379 11 Lasers in Industry 381 11.1 Introduction 381 11.2 Material-processing Applications 381 11.3 Laser Cutting 385 11.4 Laser Welding 390 11.5 Laser Drilling 393 11.6 Laser Marking and Engraving 396 11.7 Laser Micromachining 401 11.8 Photolithography 407 11.9 Rapid Manufacturing 411 11.10 Lasers in Printing 414 11.11 Summary 418 12 Lasers in Medicine 422 12.1 Introduction 422 12.2 Light–tissue Interaction 422 12.3 Laser Diagnostics 430 12.4 Therapeutic Techniques: Application Areas 442 12.5 Ophthalmology 443 12.6 Dermatology 449 12.7 Laser Dentistry 453 12.8 Vascular Surgery 455 12.9 Photodynamic Therapy 456 12.10 Thermal Therapy 459 12.11 Summary 460 13 Lasers in Science and Technology 466 13.1 Introduction 466 13.2 Optical Metrology 466 13.3 Laser Velocimetry 478 13.4 Laser Vibrometry 482 13.5 Electronic Speckle Pattern Interferometry 484 13.6 Satellite Laser Ranging 490 13.7 Lasers in Astronomy 494 13.8 Holography 496 13.9 Summary 503 14 Military Applications: Laser Instrumentation 508 14.1 Introduction 508 14.2 Military Applications of Lasers 508 14.3 Laser-based Instrumentation 512 14.4 Guided Munitions 532 14.5 Laser Communication 556 14.6 Summary 561 15 Military Applications: Directed-energy Laser Systems 566 15.1 Introduction 566 15.2 Laser Technology for Low-intensity Conflict (LIC) Applications 566 15.3 Electro-optic Countermeasures 580 15.4 Directed-energy Laser Weapons 585 15.5 Summary 592 Review Questions 595 Self-evaluation Exercise 596 Bibliography 598 Appendix A: Laser Safety 597 Index 603

Read more less

Book Synopsis. a much-needed handbook with contributions from well-chosen practitioners.Table of ContentsForeword xi List of Contributors xiii Notes on Contributors xvii List of Acronyms xxxi Part I Overview and Introduction 1. Overview and Introduction to Modeling and Simulation Support for System of Systems Engineering Applications 3Larry B. Rainey and Andreas Tolk 2. The Role of Modeling and Simulation in System of Systems Development 11Mark W. Maier Part II Theoretical and Methodological Considerations 3. Composability 45Michael C. Jones 4. An Approach for System of Systems Tradespace Exploration 75Adam M. Ross and Donna H. Rhodes 5. Data Policy Definition and Verification for System of Systems Governance 99Daniele Gianni 6. System Health Management 131Stephen B. Johnson 7. Model Methodology for a Department of Defense Architecture Design 145R. William Maule Part III Theoretical and Methodological Considerations with Applications and Lessons Learned 8. An Agent-Oriented Perspective on System of Systems for Multiple Domains 187Agostino G. Bruzzone, Alfredo Garro, Francesco Longo, and Marina Massei 9. Building Analytical Support for Homeland Security 219Sanjay Jain, Charles W. Hutchings, and Yung-Tsun Tina Lee 10. Air Transportation Systems 249William Crossley and Daniel DeLaurentis 11. Systemigram Modeling for Contextualizing Complexity in System of Systems 273Brian Sauser and John Boardman 12. Using Modeling and Simulation for System of Systems Engineering Applications in the European Space Agency 303Joachim Fuchs and Niklas Lindman 13. System of Systems Modeling and Simulation for Microgrids Using DDDAMS 337Aristotelis E. Thanos, DeLante E. Moore, Xiaoran Shi, and Nurcin Celik 14. Composition of Behavior Models for Systems Architecture 361Clifford A. Whitcomb, Mikhail Auguston, and Kristin Giammarco 15. Joint Training 393James Harrington, Laura Hinton, and Michael Wright 16. Human in the Loop in System of Systems (SoS) Modeling and Simulation: Applications to Live, Virtual, and Constructive (LVC) Distributed Mission Operations (DMO) Training 415Saurabh Mittal, Margery J. Doyle, and Antoinette M. Portrey 17. On Analysis of Ballistic Missile Defense Architecture through Surrogate Modeling and Simulation 453Tommer R. Ender, Philip D. West, William Dale Blair, and Paul A. Miceli 18. Medical Enhancements to Sustain Life during Extreme Trauma Care 479L. Drew Pihera, Nathan L. Adams, Tommer R. Ender, and Matthew L. Paden 19. Utility: Problem-Focused, Effects-Based Analysis (aka Information Value Chain Analysis) 515Thomas W. O’Brien and John F. Sarkesain 20. A Framework for Achieving Dynamic Cyber Effects through Distributed Cyber Command and Control/Battle Management (C2/BM) 531John F. Sarkesain and Thomas W. O’Brien 21. System of Systems Security 565Bharat B. Madan Part IV Conclusions 22. Toward a Research Agenda for M&S Support of System of Systems Engineering 583Andreas Tolk and Larry B. Rainey Index 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisIf we had computers that knew everything there was to know about things?using data they gathered without any help from us?we would be able to track and count everything, and greatly reduce waste, loss, and cost. We would know when things needed replacing, repairing or recalling, and whether they were fresh or past their best. The Internet of Things has the potential to change the world, just as the Internet did. Maybe even more so. ?Kevin Ashton, originator of the term, Internet of Things An examination of the concept and unimagined potential unleashed by the Internet of Things (IoT) with IPv6 and MIPv6 What is the Internet of Things? How can it help my organization? What is the cost of deploying such a system? What are the security implications? Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M Communications answers these questions and many more. This essential book explains the concept and potential that the IoTable of ContentsPREFACE xiii ABOUT THE AUTHOR xvii 1 WHAT IS THE INTERNET OF THINGS? 1 1.1 Overview and Motivations 1 1.2 Examples of Applications 12 1.3 IPv6 Role 17 1.4 Areas of Development and Standardization 20 1.5 Scope of the Present Investigation 23 Appendix 1.A: Some Related Literature 25 References 26 2 INTERNET OF THINGS DEFINITIONS AND FRAMEWORKS 28 2.1 IoT Definitions 28 2.1.1 General Observations 28 2.1.2 ITU-T Views 31 2.1.3 Working Definition 33 2.2 IoT Frameworks 38 2.3 Basic Nodal Capabilities 44 References 46 3 INTERNET OF THINGS APPLICATION EXAMPLES 48 3.1 Overview 49 3.2 Smart MeteringAdvanced Metering Infrastructure 52 3.3 e-HealthBody Area Networks 55 3.4 City Automation 62 3.5 Automotive Applications 64 3.6 Home Automation 67 3.7 Smart Cards 70 3.8 Tracking (Following and Monitoring Mobile Objects) 77 3.9 Over-The-Air-Passive SurveillanceRing of Steel 79 3.10 Control Application Examples 86 3.11 Myriad Other Applications 93 References 94 4 FUNDAMENTAL IoT MECHANISMS AND KEY TECHNOLOGIES 97 4.1 Identification of IoT Objects and Services 97 4.2 Structural Aspects of the IoT 101 4.2.1 Environment Characteristics 101 4.2.2 Traffic Characteristics 102 4.2.3 Scalability 102 4.2.4 Interoperability 103 4.2.5 Security and Privacy 103 4.2.6 Open Architecture 103 4.3 Key IoT Technologies 103 4.3.1 Device Intelligence 103 4.3.2 Communication Capabilities 104 4.3.3 Mobility Support 104 4.3.4 Device Power 105 4.3.5 Sensor Technology 107 4.3.6 RFID Technology 111 4.3.7 Satellite Technology 118 References 119 5 EVOLVING IoT STANDARDS 120 5.1 Overview and Approaches 120 5.2 IETF IPv6 Routing Protocol for RPL Roll 123 5.3 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 126 5.3.1 Background 126 5.3.2 Messaging Model 129 5.3.3 RequestResponse Model 129 5.3.4 Intermediaries and Caching 129 5.4 Representational State Transfer (REST) 130 5.5 ETSI M2M 130 5.6 Third-Generation Partnership Project Service Requirements for Machine-Type Communications 131 5.6.1 Approach 131 5.6.2 Architectural Reference Model for MTC 134 5.7 CENELEC 135 5.8 IETF IPv6 Over Lowpower WPAN (6LoWPAN) 137 5.9 ZigBee IP (ZIP) 137 5.10 IP in Smart Objects (IPSO) 138 Appendix 5.A: Legacy Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Systems 138 References 142 6 LAYER 12 CONNECTIVITY: WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 144 6.1 WPAN Technologies for IoTM2M 145 6.1.1 ZigbeeIEEE 802.15.4 155 6.1.2 Radio Frequency for Consumer Electronics (RF4CE) 170 6.1.3 Bluetooth and its Low-Energy Profile 170 6.1.4 IEEE 802.15.6 WBANs 180 6.1.5 IEEE 802.15 WPAN TG4j MBANs 181 6.1.6 ETSI TR 101 557 184 6.1.7 NFC 187 6.1.8 Dedicated Short-Range Communications (DSRC) and Related Protocols 189 6.1.9 Comparison of WPAN Technologies 192 6.2 Cellular and Mobile Network Technologies for IoTM2M 195 6.2.1 Overview and Motivations 195 6.2.2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System 196 6.2.3 LTE 197 Appendix 6.A: Non-Wireless Technologies for IoT: Powerline Communications 209 References 216 7 LAYER 3 CONNECTIVITY: IPv6 TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 220 7.1 Overview and Motivations 220 7.2 Address Capabilities 224 7.2.1 IPv4 Addressing and Issues 224 7.2.2 IPv6 Address Space 225 7.3 IPv6 Protocol Overview 231 7.4 IPv6 Tunneling 239 7.5 IPsec in IPv6 242 7.6 Header Compression Schemes 242 7.7 Quality of Service in IPv6 245 7.8 Migration Strategies to IPv6 246 7.8.1 Technical Approaches 246 7.8.2 Residential Broadband Services in an IPv6 Environment 250 7.8.3 Deployment Opportunities 252 References 254 8 LAYER 3 CONNECTIVITY: MOBILE IPv6 TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 257 8.1 Overview 257 8.2 Protocol Details 266 8.2.1 Generic Mechanisms 267 8.2.2 New IPv6 Protocol, Message Types, and Destination Option 271 8.2.3 Modifications to IPv6 Neighbor Discovery 277 8.2.4 Requirements for Various IPv6 Nodes 278 8.2.5 Correspondent Node Operation 278 8.2.6 HA Node Operation 285 8.2.7 Mobile Node Operation 286 8.2.8 Relationship to IPV4 Mobile IPv4 (MIP) 291 References 292 9 IPv6 OVER LOW-POWER WPAN (6LoWPAN) 293 9.1 BackgroundIntroduction 294 9.2 6LoWPANs Goals 296 9.3 Transmission of IPv6 Packets Over IEEE 802.15.4 297 References 301 GLOSSARY 302 INDEX 356

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectric drives in sustainable energy systems use a physics-based approach to electric drive control. The proper control of electric motors and systems represents significant energy savings and has applications in factory automation, clean transportation, and renewable energy resource management.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Notation xv 1 Applications: Speed and Torque Control 1 1-1 History 1 1-2 Background 2 1-3 Types of ac Drives Discussed and the Simulation Software 2 1-4 Structure of this Textbook 3 1-5 “Test” Induction Motor 3 1-6 Summary 4 References 4 Problems 4 2 Induction Machine Equations in Phase Quantities: Assisted by Space Vectors 6 2-1 Introduction 6 2-2 Sinusoidally Distributed Stator Windings 6 2-2-1 Three-Phase, Sinusoidally Distributed Stator Windings 8 2-3 Stator Inductances (Rotor Open-Circuited) 9 2-3-1 Stator Single-Phase Magnetizing Inductance Lm,1-phase 9 2-3-2 Stator Mutual-Inductance Lmutual 11 2-3-3 Per-Phase Magnetizing-Inductance Lm 12 2-3-4 Stator-Inductance Ls 12 2-4 Equivalent Windings in a Squirrel-Cage Rotor 13 2-4-1 Rotor-Winding Inductances (Stator Open-Circuited) 13 2-5 Mutual Inductances between the Stator and the Rotor Phase Windings 15 2-6 Review of Space Vectors 15 2-6-1 Relationship between Phasors and Space Vectors in Sinusoidal Steady State 17 2-7 Flux Linkages 18 2-7-1 Stator Flux Linkage (Rotor Open-Circuited) 18 2-7-2 Rotor Flux Linkage (Stator Open-Circuited) 19 2-7-3 Stator and Rotor Flux Linkages (Simultaneous Stator and Rotor Currents) 20 2-8 Stator and Rotor Voltage Equations in Terms of Space Vectors 21 2-9 Making the Case for a dq -Winding Analysis 22 2-10 Summary 25 Reference 25 Problems 26 3 Dynamic Analysis of Induction Machines in Terms of dq Windings 28 3-1 Introduction 28 3-2 dq Winding Representation 28 3-2-1 Stator dq Winding Representation 29 3-2-2 Rotor dq Windings (Along the Same dq-Axes as in the Stator) 31 3-2-3 Mutual Inductance between dq Windings on the Stator and the Rotor 32 3-3 Mathematical Relationships of the dq Windings (at an Arbitrary Speed ωd) 33 3-3-1 Relating dq Winding Variables to Phase Winding Variables 35 3-3-2 Flux Linkages of dq Windings in Terms of Their Currents 36 3-3-3 dq Winding Voltage Equations 37 3-3-4 Obtaining Fluxes and Currents with Voltages as Inputs 40 3-4 Choice of the dqWinding Speed ωd 41 3-5 Electromagnetic Torque 42 3-5-1 Torque on the Rotor d -Axis Winding 42 3-5-2 Torque on the Rotor q -Axis Winding 43 3-5-3 Net Electromagnetic Torque Tem on the Rotor 44 3-6 Electrodynamics 44 3-7 d- and q-Axis Equivalent Circuits 45 3-8 Relationship between the dq Windings and the Per-Phase Phasor-Domain Equivalent Circuit in Balanced Sinusoidal Steady State 46 3-9 Computer Simulation 47 3-9-1 Calculation of Initial Conditions 48 3-10 Summary 56 Reference 56 Problems 57 4 Vector Control of Induction-Motor Drives: A Qualitative Examination 59 4-1 Introduction 59 4-2 Emulation of dc and Brushless dc Drive Performance 59 4-2-1 Vector Control of Induction-Motor Drives 61 4-3 Analogy to a Current-Excited Transformer with a Shorted Secondary 62 4-3-1 Using the Transformer Equivalent Circuit 65 4-4 d- and q -Axis Winding Representation 66 4-5 Vector Control with d-Axis Aligned with the Rotor Flux 67 4-5-1 Initial Flux Buildup Prior to t = 0−67 4-5-2 Step Change in Torque at t = 0+68 4-6 Torque, Speed, and Position Control 72 4-6-1 The Reference Current isq t * ( ) 72 4-6-2 The Reference Current isd t ( ) 73 4-6-3 Transformation and Inverse-Transformation of Stator Currents 73 4-6-4 The Estimated Motor Model for Vector Control 74 4-7 The Power-Processing Unit (PPU) 75 4-8 Summary 76 References 76 Problems 77 5 Mathematical Description of Vector Control in Induction Machines 79 5-1 Motor Model with the d-Axis Aligned Along the Rotor Flux Linkage λ r-Axis 79 5-1-1 Calculation of ωdA 81 5-1-2 Calculation of Tem 81 5-1-3 d-Axis Rotor Flux Linkage Dynamics 82 5-1-4 Motor Model 82 5-2 Vector Control 84 5-2-1 Speed and Position Control Loops 86 5-2-2 Initial Startup 89 5-2-3 Calculating the Stator Voltages to Be Applied 89 5-2-4 Designing the PI Controllers 90 5-3 Summary 95 Reference 95 Problems 95 6 Detuning Effects in Induction Motor Vector Control 97 6-1 Effect of Detuning Due to Incorrect Rotor Time Constant τr 97 6-2 Steady-State Analysis 101 6-2-1 Steady-State isd /is*d 104 6-2-2 Steady-State isq /is*q 104 6-2-3 Steady-State θerr 105 6-2-4 Steady-State Tem /Te*m 106 6-3 Summary 107 References 107 Problems 108 7 Dynamic Analysis of Doubly Fed Induction Generators and Their Vector Control 109 7-1 Understanding DFIG Operation 110 7-2 Dynamic Analysis of DFIG 116 7-3 Vector Control of DFIG 116 7-4 Summary 117 References 117 Problems 117 8 Space Vector Pulse Width-Modulated (SV-PWM) Inverters 119 8-1 Introduction 119 8-2 Synthesis of Stator Voltage Space Vector vsa 119 8-3 Computer Simulation of SV-PWM Inverter 124 8-4 Limit on the Amplitude ˆVs of the Stator Voltage Space Vectov sa 125 Summary 128 References 128 Problems 129 9 Direct Torque Control (DTC) and Encoderless Operation of Induction Motor Drives 130 9-1 Introduction 130 9-2 System Overview 130 9-3 Principle of Encoderless DTC Operation 131 9-4 Calculation of λs, λ r, Tem, and ωm 132 9-4-1 Calculation of the Stator Flux λ s 132 9-4-2 Calculation of the Rotor Flux λ r 133 9-4-3 Calculation of the Electromagnetic Torque Tem 134 9-4-4 Calculation of the Rotor Speed ωm 135 9-5 Calculation of the Stator Voltage Space Vector 136 9-6 Direct Torque Control Using dq-Axes 139 9-7 Summary 139 References 139 Problems 139 Appendix 9-A 140 Derivation of Torque Expressions 140 10 Vector Control of Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor Drives 143 10-1 Introduction 143 10-2 d-q Analysis of Permanent Magnet (Nonsalient-Pole) Synchronous Machines 143 10-2-1 Flux Linkages 144 10-2-2 Stator dq Winding Voltages 144 10-2-3 Electromagnetic Torque 145 10-2-4 Electrodynamics 145 10-2-5 Relationship between the dq Circuits and the Per-Phase Phasor-Domain Equivalent Circuit in Balanced Sinusoidal Steady State 145 10-2-6 dq-Based Dynamic Controller for “Brushless DC” Drives 147 10-3 Salient-Pole Synchronous Machines 151 10-3-1 Inductances 152 10-3-2 Flux Linkages 153 10-3-3 Winding Voltages 153 10-3-4 Electromagnetic Torque 154 10-3-5 dq-Axis Equivalent Circuits 154 10-3-6 Space Vector Diagram in Steady State 154 10-4 Summary 156 References 156 Problems 156 11 Switched-Reluctance Motor (SRM) Drives 157 11-1 Introduction 157 11-2 Switched-Reluctance Motor 157 11-2-1 Electromagnetic Torque Tem 159 11-2-2 Induced Back-EMF ea 161 11-3 Instantaneous Waveforms 162 11-4 Role of Magnetic Saturation 164 11-5 Power Processing Units for SRM Drives 165 11-6 Determining the Rotor Position for Encoderles Operation 166 11-7 Control in Motoring Mode 166 11-8 Summary 167 References 167 Problems 167 Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the latest methods for designing and fabricating self-powered micro-generators and energy harvester systems Design and Fabrication of Self-Powered Micro-Harvesters introduces the latest trends of self-powered generators and energy harvester systems, including the design, analysis and fabrication of micro power systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Energy Harvesters 2 1.2.1 Piezoelectric ZnO Energy Harvester 3 1.2.2 Vibrational Electromagnetic Generators 3 1.2.3 Rotary Electromagnetic Generators 4 1.2.4 NFES Piezoelectric PVDF Energy Harvester 4 1.3 Overview 5 2 Design and Fabrication of Flexible Piezoelectric Generators Based on ZnO Thin Films 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Characterization and Theoretical Analysis of Flexible ZnO-Based Piezoelectric Harvesters 10 2.2.1 Vibration Energy Conversion Model of Film-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Energy Harvester 10 2.2.2 Piezoelectricity and Polarity Test of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Film 12 2.2.3 Optimal Thickness of PET Substrate 15 2.2.4 Model Solution of Cantilever Plate Equation 15 2.2.5 Vibration-Induced Electric Potential and Electric Power 18 2.2.6 Static Analysis to Calculate the Optimal Thickness of the PET Substrate 19 2.2.7 Model Analysis and Harmonic Analysis 21 2.2.8 Results of Model Analysis and Harmonic Analysis 23 2.3 The Fabrication of Flexible Piezoelectric ZnO Harvesters on PET Substrates 27 2.3.1 Bonding Process to Fabricate UV-Curable Resin Lump Structures on PET Substrates 27 2.3.2 Near-Field Electro-Spinning with Stereolithography Technique to Directly Write 3D UV-Curable Resin Patterns on PET Substrates 29 2.3.3 Sputtering of Al and ITO Conductive Thin Films on PET Substrates 29 2.3.4 Deposition of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films by Using RF Magnetron Sputtering 31 2.3.5 Testing a Single Energy Harvester under Resonant and Non-Resonant Conditions 34 2.3.6 Application of ZnO/PET-Based Generator to Flash Signal LED Module 39 2.3.7 Design and Performance of a Broad Bandwidth Energy Harvesting System 40 2.4 Fabrication and Performance of Flexible ZnO/SUS304-Based Piezoelectric Generators 48 2.4.1 Deposition of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 48 2.4.2 Single-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 50 2.4.3 Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 51 2.4.4 Characterization of ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generators 52 2.4.5 Structural and Morphological Properties of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 54 2.4.6 Analysis of Adhesion of ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 56 2.4.7 Electrical Properties of Single-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 59 2.4.8 Characterization of Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator: Analysis and Modification of Back Surface of SUS304 61 2.4.9 Electrical Properties of Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Piezoelectric Generator 63 2.5 Summary 66 References 67 3 Design and Fabrication of Vibration-Induced Electromagnetic Microgenerators 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Comparisons between MCTG and SMTG 74 3.2.1 Magnetic Core-Type Generator (MCTG) 74 3.2.2 Sided Magnet-Type Generator (SMTG) 76 3.3 Analysis of Electromagnetic Vibration-Induced Microgenerators 76 3.3.1 Design of Electromagnetic Vibration-Induced Microgenerators 77 3.3.2 Analysis Mode of the Microvibration Structure 78 3.3.3 Analysis Mode of Magnetic Field 81 3.3.4 Evaluation of Various Parameters of Power Output 84 3.4 Analytical Results and Discussion 88 3.4.1 Analysis of Bending Stress within the Supporting Beam of the Spiral Microspring 90 3.4.2 Finite Element Models for Magnetic Density Distribution 93 3.4.3 Power Output Evaluation 97 3.5 Fabrication of Microcoil for Microgenerator 103 3.5.1 Microspring and Induction Coil 103 3.5.2 Microspring and Magnet 105 3.6 Tests and Experiments 106 3.6.1 Measurement System 106 3.6.2 Measurement Results and Discussion 107 3.6.3 Comparison between Measured Results and Analytical Values 110 3.7 Conclusions 112 3.7.1 Analysis of Microgenerators and Vibration Mode and Simulation of the Magnetic Field 112 3.7.2 Fabrication of LTCC Microsensor 112 3.7.3 Measurement and Analysis Results 113 3.8 Summary 113 References 114 4 Design and Fabrication of Rotary Electromagnetic Microgenerator 117 4.1 Introduction 117 4.1.1 Piezoelectric, Thermoelectric, and Electrostatic Generators 119 4.1.2 Vibrational Electromagnetic Generators 119 4.1.3 Rotary Electromagnetic Generators 120 4.1.4 Generator Processes 121 4.1.5 Lithographie Galvanoformung Abformung Process 122 4.1.6 Winding Processes 123 4.1.7 LTCC 123 4.1.8 Printed Circuit Board Processes 124 4.1.9 Finite-Element Simulation and Analytical Solutions 126 4.2 Case 1: Winding Generator 126 4.2.1 Design 127 4.2.2 Analytical Formulation 132 4.2.3 Simulation 134 4.2.4 Fabrication Process 138 4.2.5 Results and Discussion (1) 139 4.2.6 Results and Discussion (2) 142 4.3 Case 2: LTCC Generator 146 4.3.1 Simulation 147 4.3.2 Analytical Theorem of Microgenerator Electromagnetism 148 4.3.3 Simplification 152 4.3.4 Analysis of Vector Magnetic Potential 153 4.3.5 Analytical Solutions for Power Generation 154 4.4 Fabrication 157 4.4.1 LTCC Process 157 4.4.2 Magnet Process 159 4.4.3 Measurement Set-up 160 4.5 Results and Discussion 162 4.5.1 Design 162 4.5.2 Analytical Solutions 168 4.5.3 Fabrication 170 References 178 5 Design and Fabrication of Electrospun PVDF Piezo-Energy Harvesters 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Fundamentals of Electrospinning Technology 187 5.2.1 Introduction to Electrospinning 187 5.2.2 Alignment and Assembly of Nanofibers 190 5.3 Near-Field Electrospinning 191 5.3.1 Introduction and Background 191 5.3.2 Principles of Operation 194 5.3.3 Process and Experiment 196 5.3.4 Summary 202 5.4 Continuous NFES 202 5.4.1 Introduction and Background 202 5.4.2 Principles of Operation 202 5.4.3 Controllability and Continuity 205 5.4.4 Process Characterization 208 5.4.5 Summary 211 5.5 Direct-Write Piezoelectric Nanogenerator 211 5.5.1 Introduction and Background 211 5.5.2 Polyvinylidene Fluoride 212 5.5.3 Theoretical Studies for Realization of Electrospun PVDF Nanofibers 213 5.5.4 Electrospinning of PVDF Nanofibers 216 5.5.5 Detailed Discussion of Process Parameters 219 5.5.6 Experimental Realization of PVDF Nanogenerator 223 5.5.7 Summary 241 5.6 Materials, Structure, and Operation of Nanogenerator with Future Prospects 241 5.6.1 Material and Structural Characteristics 241 5.6.2 Operation of Nanogenerator 243 5.6.3 Summary and Future Prospects 248 5.7 Case Study: Large-Array Electrospun PVDF Nanogenerators on a Flexible Substrate 248 5.7.1 Introduction and Background 248 5.7.2 Working Principle 249 5.7.3 Device Fabrication 249 5.7.4 Experimental Results 251 5.7.5 Summary 252 5.8 Conclusion 253 5.8.1 Near-Field Electrospinning 253 5.8.2 Continuous Near-Field Electrospinning 254 5.8.3 Direct-Write Piezoelectric PVDF 254 5.9 Future Directions 255 5.9.1 NFES Integrated Nanofiber Sensors 255 5.9.2 NFES One-Dimensional Sub-Wavelength Waveguide 256 5.9.3 NFES Biological Applications 257 5.9.4 Direct-Write Piezoelectric PVDF Nanogenerators 258 References 258 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis bookpresents material on both the analysis of the classical concepts of correlation and on the development of their robust versions, as well as discussing the related concepts of correlation matrices, partial correlation, canonical correlation, rank correlations, with the corresponding robust and non-robust estimation procedures.Trade Review“This book can be used as a reference book for professional statisticians and users of statistical methods. It can also serve as a graduate level textbook for a special topic course on robust correlation” Yuehua Wu, MathSciNet, Aug 2017Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Remarks 1 1.2 Ontological Remarks 4 1.2.1 Forms of data representation 5 1.2.2 Types of data statistics 5 1.2.3 Principal aims of statistical data analysis 6 1.2.4 Prior information about data distributions and related approaches to statistical data analysis 6 References 8 2 Classical Measures of Correlation 10 2.1 Preliminaries 10 2.2 Pearson’s Correlation Coefficient: Definitions and Interpretations 12 2.2.1 Introductory remarks 13 2.2.2 Correlation via regression 13 2.2.3 Correlation via the coefficient of determination 16 2.2.4 Correlation via the variances of the principal components 18 2.2.5 Correlation via the cosine of the angle between the variable vectors 21 2.2.6 Correlation via the ratio of two means 22 2.2.7 Pearson’s correlation coefficient between random events 23 2.3 Nonparametric Measures of Correlation 24 2.3.1 Introductory remarks 24 2.3.2 The quadrant correlation coefficient 26 2.3.3 The Spearman rank correlation coefficient 27 2.3.4 The Kendall 𝜏-rank correlation coefficient 28 2.3.5 Concluding remark 29 2.4 Informational Measures of Correlation 29 2.5 Summary 31 References 31 3 Robust Estimation of Location 33 3.1 Preliminaries 33 3.2 Huber’s Minimax Approach 35 3.2.1 Introductory remarks 35 3.2.2 Minimax variance M-estimates of location 36 3.2.3 Minimax bias M-estimates of location 43 3.2.4 L-estimates of location 44 3.2.5 R-estimates of location 45 3.2.6 The relations between M-, L- and R-estimates of location 46 3.2.7 Concluding remarks 47 3.3 Hampel’s Approach Based on Influence Functions 47 3.3.1 Introductory remarks 47 3.3.2 Sensitivity curve 47 3.3.3 Influence function and its properties 49 3.3.4 Local measures of robustness 51 3.3.5 B- and V-robustness 52 3.3.6 Global measure of robustness: the breakdown point 52 3.3.7 Redescending M-estimates 53 3.3.8 Concluding remark 56 3.4 Robust Estimation of Location: A Sequel 56 3.4.1 Introductory remarks 56 3.4.2 Huber’s minimax variance approach in distribution density models of a non-neighborhood nature 57 3.4.3 Robust estimation of location in distribution models with a bounded variance 62 3.4.4 On the robustness of robust solutions: stability of least informative distributions 69 3.4.5 Concluding remark 73 3.5 Stable Estimation 73 3.5.1 Introductory remarks 73 3.5.2 Variance sensitivity 74 3.5.3 Estimation stability 76 3.5.4 Robustness of stable estimates 78 3.5.5 Maximin stable redescending M-estimates 83 3.5.6 Concluding remarks 84 3.6 Robustness Versus Gaussianity 85 3.6.1 Introductory remarks 85 3.6.2 Derivations of the Gaussian distribution 87 3.6.3 Properties of the Gaussian distribution 92 3.6.4 Huber’s minimax approach and Gaussianity 100 3.6.5 Concluding remarks 101 3.7 Summary 102 References 102 4 Robust Estimation of Scale 107 4.1 Preliminaries 107 4.1.1 Introductory remarks 107 4.1.2 Estimation of scale in data analysis 108 4.1.3 Measures of scale defined by functionals 110 4.2 M- and L-Estimates of Scale 111 4.2.1 M-estimates of scale 111 4.2.2 L-estimates of scale 115 4.3 Huber Minimax Variance Estimates of Scale 116 4.3.1 Introductory remarks 116 4.3.2 The least informative distribution 117 4.3.3 Minimax variance M- and L-estimates of scale 118 4.4 Highly Efficient Robust Estimates of Scale 119 4.4.1 Introductory remarks 119 4.4.2 The median of absolute deviations and its properties 120 4.4.3 The quartile of pair-wise absolute differences Qn estimate and its properties 121 4.4.4 M-estimate approximations to the Qn estimate: MQ𝛼n, FQ𝛼n , and FQn estimates of scale 122 4.5 Monte Carlo Experiment 130 4.5.1 A remark on the Monte Carlo experiment accuracy 131 4.5.2 Monte Carlo experiment: distribution models 131 4.5.3 Monte Carlo experiment: estimates of scale 132 4.5.4 Monte Carlo experiment: characteristics of performance 133 4.5.5 Monte Carlo experiment: results 134 4.5.6 Monte Carlo experiment: discussion 136 4.5.7 Concluding remarks 138 4.6 Summary 138 References 139 5 Robust Estimation of Correlation Coefficients 140 5.1 Preliminaries 140 5.2 Main Groups of Robust Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 141 5.2.1 Introductory remarks 141 5.2.2 Direct robust counterparts of Pearson’s correlation coefficient 142 5.2.3 Robust correlation via nonparametric measures of correlation 143 5.2.4 Robust correlation via robust regression 143 5.2.5 Robust correlation via robust principal component variances 145 5.2.6 Robust correlation via two-stage procedures 147 5.2.7 Concluding remarks 147 5.3 Asymptotic Properties of the Classical Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 148 5.3.1 Pearson’s sample correlation coefficient 148 5.3.2 The maximum likelihood estimate of the correlation coefficient at the normal 149 5.4 Asymptotic Properties of Nonparametric Estimates of Correlation 151 5.4.1 Introductory remarks 151 5.4.2 The quadrant correlation coefficient 152 5.4.3 The Kendall rank correlation coefficient 152 5.4.4 The Spearman rank correlation coefficient 153 5.5 Bivariate Independent Component Distributions 155 5.5.1 Definition and properties 155 5.5.2 Independent component and Tukey gross-error distribution models 156 5.6 Robust Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient Based on Principal Component Variances 158 5.7 Robust Minimax Bias and Variance Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 161 5.7.1 Introductory remarks 161 5.7.2 Minimax property 162 5.7.3 Concluding remarks 163 5.8 Robust Correlation via Highly Efficient Robust Estimates of Scale 163 5.8.1 Introductory remarks 163 5.8.2 Asymptotic bias and variance of generalized robust estimates of the correlation coefficient 164 5.8.3 Concluding remarks 165 5.9 Robust M-Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient in Independent Component Distribution Models 165 5.9.1 Introductory remarks 165 5.9.2 The maximum likelihood estimate of the correlation coefficient in independent component distribution models 165 5.9.3 M-estimates of the correlation coefficient 166 5.9.4 Asymptotic variance of M-estimators 166 5.9.5 Minimax variance M-estimates of the correlation coefficient 167 5.9.6 Concluding remarks 168 5.10 Monte Carlo Performance Evaluation 168 5.10.1 Introductory remarks 168 5.10.2 Monte Carlo experiment set-up 168 5.10.3 Discussion 171 5.10.4 Concluding remarks 173 5.11 Robust Stable Radical M-Estimate of the Correlation Coefficient of the Bivariate Normal Distribution 173 5.11.1 Introductory remarks 173 5.11.2 Asymptotic characteristics of the stable radical estimate of the correlation coefficient 174 5.11.3 Concluding remarks 175 5.12 Summary 176 References 176 6 Classical Measures of Multivariate Correlation 178 6.1 Preliminaries 178 6.2 Covariance Matrix and Correlation Matrix 179 6.3 Sample Mean Vector and Sample Covariance Matrix 181 6.4 Families of Multivariate Distributions 182 6.4.1 Construction of multivariate location-scatter models 182 6.4.2 Multivariate symmetrical distributions 183 6.4.3 Multivariate normal distribution 184 6.4.4 Multivariate elliptical distributions 184 6.4.5 Independent component model 186 6.4.6 Copula models 186 6.5 Asymptotic Behavior of Sample Covariance Matrix and Sample Correlation Matrix 187 6.6 First Uses of Covariance and Correlation Matrices 189 6.7 Working with the Covariance Matrix–Principal Component Analysis 191 6.7.1 Principal variables 191 6.7.2 Interpretation of principal components 193 6.7.3 Asymptotic behavior of the eigenvectors and eigenvalues 194 6.8 Working with Correlations–Canonical Correlation Analysis 195 6.8.1 Canonical variates and canonical correlations 195 6.8.2 Testing for independence between subvectors 197 6.9 Conditionally Uncorrelated Components 199 6.10 Summary 200 References 200 7 Robust Estimation of Scatter and Correlation Matrices 202 7.1 Preliminaries 202 7.2 Multivariate Location and Scatter Functionals 202 7.3 Influence Functions and Asymptotics 205 7.4 M-functionals for Location and Scatter 208 7.5 Breakdown Point 210 7.6 Use of Robust Scatter Matrices 211 7.6.1 Ellipticity assumption 211 7.6.2 Robust correlation matrices 212 7.6.3 Principal component analysis 212 7.6.4 Canonical correlation analysis 213 7.7 Further Uses of Location and Scatter Functionals 213 7.8 Summary 215 References 215 8 Nonparametric Measures of Multivariate Correlation 217 8.1 Preliminaries 217 8.2 Univariate Signs and Ranks 218 8.3 Marginal Signs and Ranks 220 8.4 Spatial Signs and Ranks 222 8.5 Affine Equivariant Signs and Ranks 226 8.6 Summary 229 References 230 9 Applications to Exploratory Data Analysis: Detection of Outliers 231 9.1 Preliminaries 231 9.2 State of the Art 232 9.2.1 Univariate boxplots 232 9.2.2 Bivariate boxplots 234 9.3 Problem Setting 237 9.4 A New Measure of Outlier Detection Performance 239 9.4.1 Introductory remarks 240 9.4.2 H-mean: motivation, definition and properties 241 9.5 Robust Versions of the Tukey Boxplot with Their Application to Detection of Outliers 243 9.5.1 Data generation and performance measure 243 9.5.2 Scale and shift contamination 243 9.5.3 Real-life data results 244 9.5.4 Concluding remarks 245 9.6 Robust Bivariate Boxplots and Their Performance Evaluation 245 9.6.1 Bivariate FQ-boxplot 245 9.6.2 Bivariate FQ-boxplot performance 247 9.6.3 Measuring the elliptical deviation from the convex hull 249 9.7 Summary 253 References 253 10 Applications to Time Series Analysis: Robust Spectrum Estimation 255 10.1 Preliminaries 255 10.2 Classical Estimation of a Power Spectrum 256 10.2.1 Introductory remarks 256 10.2.2 Classical nonparametric estimation of a power spectrum 258 10.2.3 Parametric estimation of a power spectrum 259 10.3 Robust Estimation of a Power Spectrum 259 10.3.1 Introductory remarks 259 10.3.2 Robust analogs of the discrete Fourier transform 261 10.3.3 Robust nonparametric estimation 262 10.3.4 Robust estimation of power spectrum through the Yule–Walker equations 263 10.3.5 Robust estimation through robust filtering 263 10.4 Performance Evaluation 264 10.4.1 Robustness of the median Fourier transform power spectra 264 10.4.2 Additive outlier contamination model 264 10.4.3 Disorder contamination model 264 10.4.4 Concluding remarks 270 10.5 Summary 270 References 270 11 Applications to Signal Processing: Robust Detection 272 11.1 Preliminaries 272 11.1.1 Classical approach to detection 272 11.1.2 Robust minimax approach to hypothesis testing 273 11.1.3 Asymptotically optimal robust detection of a weak signal 274 11.2 Robust Minimax Detection Based on a Distance Rule 275 11.2.1 Introductory remarks 275 11.2.2 Asymptotic robust minimax detection of a known constant signal with the 𝜌-distance rule 276 11.2.3 Detection performance in asymptotics and on finite samples 278 11.2.4 Concluding remarks 283 11.3 Robust Detection of a Weak Signal with Redescending M-Estimates 285 11.3.1 Introductory remarks 285 11.3.2 Detection error sensitivity and stability 287 11.3.3 Performance evaluation: a comparative study 289 11.3.4 Concluding remarks 291 11.4 A Unified Neyman–Pearson Detection of Weak Signals in a Fusion Model with Fading Channels and Non-Gaussian Noises 296 11.4.1 Introductory remarks 296 11.4.2 Problem setting—an asymptotic fusion rule 298 11.4.3 Asymptotic performance analysis 299 11.4.4 Numerical results 303 11.4.5 Concluding remarks 305 11.5 Summary 306 References 306 12 Final Remarks 308 12.1 Points of Growth: Open Problems in Multivariate Statistics 308 12.2 Points of Growth: Open Problems in Applications 309 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is aimed at students in communications and signal processing who want to extend their skills in the energy area. It describes power systems and why these backgrounds are so useful to smart grid, wireless communications being very different to traditional wireline communications.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix Some Notation xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Big Data: Basic Concepts 1 1.2 Data Mining with Big Data 9 1.3 A Mathematical Introduction to Big Data 13 1.4 A Mathematical Theory of Big Data 28 1.5 Smart Grid 34 1.6 Big Data and Smart Grid 36 1.7 Reading Guide 37 Bibliographical Remarks 39 Part I Fundamentals of Big Data 41 2 The Mathematical Foundations of Big Data Systems 43 2.1 Big Data Analytics 44 2.2 Big Data: Sense, Collect, Store, and Analyze 45 2.3 Intelligent Algorithms 48 2.4 Signal Processing for Smart Grid 48 2.5 Monitoring and Optimization for Power Grids 48 2.6 Distributed Sensing and Measurement for Power Grids 49 2.7 Real-time Analysis of Streaming Data 50 2.8 Salient Features of Big Data 51 2.9 Big Data for Quantum Systems 54 2.10 Big Data for Financial Systems 55 2.11 Big Data for Atmospheric Systems 73 2.12 Big Data for Sensing Networks 74 2.13 Big Data forWireless Networks 75 2.14 Big Data for Transportation 78 Bibliographical Remarks 78 3 Large Random Matrices: An Introduction 79 3.1 Modeling of Large Dimensional Data as Random Matrices 79 3.2 A Brief of Random MatrixTheory 81 3.3 Change Point of Views: From Vectors to Measures 85 3.4 The Stieltjes Transform of Measures 86 3.5 A Fundamental Result: The Marchenko–Pastur Equation 88 3.6 Linear Eigenvalue Statistics and Limit Laws 89 3.7 Central LimitTheorem for Linear Eigenvalue Statistics 99 3.8 Central LimitTheorem for Random Matrix S−1T 101 3.9 Independence for Random Matrices 103 3.10 Matrix-Valued Gaussian Distribution 110 3.11 Matrix-ValuedWishart Distribution 112 3.12 Moment Method 112 3.13 Stieltjes Transform Method 113 3.14 Concentration of the Spectral Measure for Large Random Matrices 114 3.15 Future Directions 117 Bibliographical Remarks 117 4 Linear Spectral Statistics of the Sample Covariance Matrix 121 4.1 Linear Spectral Statistics 121 4.2 Generalized Marchenko–Pastur Distributions 122 4.3 Estimation of Spectral Density Functions 127 4.4 Limiting Spectral Distribution of Time Series 146 Bibliographical Remarks 154 5 Large Hermitian Random Matrices and Free Random Variables 155 5.1 Large Economic/Financial Systems 156 5.2 Matrix-Valued Probability 157 5.3 Wishart-Levy Free Stable Random Matrices 166 5.4 Basic Concepts for Free Random Variables 168 5.5 The Analytical Spectrum of theWishart–Levy Random Matrix 172 5.6 Basic Properties of the Stieltjes Transform 176 5.7 Basic Theorems for the Stieltjes Transform 179 5.8 Free Probability for Hermitian Random Matrices 185 5.9 Random Vandermonde Matrix 196 5.10 Non-Asymptotic Analysis of State Estimation 200 Bibliographical Remarks 201 6 Large Non-Hermitian Random Matrices and Quatartenionic Free Probability Theory 203 6.1 Quatartenionic Free ProbabilityTheory 204 6.2 R-diagonalMatrices 209 6.3 The Sum of Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 216 6.4 The Product of Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 220 6.5 Singular Value Equivalent Models 226 6.6 The Power of the Non-Hermitian Random Matrix 234 6.7 Power Series of Large Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 239 6.8 Products of Random Ginibre Matrices 246 6.9 Products of Rectangular Gaussian Random Matrices 249 6.10 Product of ComplexWishart Matrices 252 6.11 Spectral Relations between Products and Powers 254 6.12 Products of Finite-Size I.I.D. Gaussian Random Matrices 258 6.13 Lyapunov Exponents for Products of Complex Gaussian Random Matrices 260 6.14 Euclidean Random Matrices 264 6.15 Random Matrices with Independent Entries and the Circular Law 273 6.16 The Circular Law and Outliers 275 6.17 Random SVD, Single Ring Law, and Outliers 285 6.18 The Elliptic Law and Outliers 295 Bibliographical Remarks 305 7 The Mathematical Foundations of Data Collection 307 7.1 Architectures and Applications for Big Data 307 7.2 Covariance Matrix Estimation 308 7.3 Spectral Estimators for Large Random Matrices 312 7.4 Asymptotic Framework for Matrix Reconstruction 319 7.5 Optimum Shrinkage 329 7.6 A Shrinkage Approach to Large-Scale Covariance Matrix Estimation 331 7.7 Eigenvectors of Large Sample Covariance Matrix Ensembles 338 7.8 A General Class of Random Matrices 351 Bibliographical Remarks 359 8 Matrix Hypothesis Testing using Large RandomMatrices 361 8.1 Motivating Examples 362 8.2 Hypothesis Test of Two Alternative Random Matrices 363 8.3 Eigenvalue Bounds for Expectation and Variance 364 8.4 Concentration of Empirical Distribution Functions 369 8.5 Random Quadratic Forms 381 8.6 Log-Determinant of Random Matrices 382 8.7 General MANOVA Matrices 383 8.8 Finite Rank Perturbations of Large Random Matrices 386 8.9 Hypothesis Tests for High-Dimensional Datasets 391 8.9.1 Motivation for Likelihood Ratio Test (LRT) and Covariance Matrix Tests 392 8.10 Roy’s Largest Root Test 428 8.11 Optimal Tests of Hypotheses for Large Random Matrices 431 8.12 Matrix Elliptically Contoured Distributions 444 8.13 Hypothesis Testing for Matrix Elliptically Contoured Distributions 446 Bibliographical Remarks 452 Part II Smart Grid 455 9 Applications and Requirements of Smart Grid 457 9.1 History 457 9.2 Concepts and Vision 458 9.3 Today’s Electric Grid 459 9.4 Future Smart Electrical Energy System 464 10 Technical Challenges for Smart Grid 471 Bibliographical Remarks 483 11 Big Data for Smart Grid 485 11.1 Power in Numbers: Big Data and Grid Infrastructure 485 11.2 Energy’s Internet:The Convergence of Big Data and the Cloud 486 11.3 Edge Analytics: Consumers, Electric Vehicles, and Distributed Generation 486 11.4 CrosscuttingThemes: Big Data 486 11.5 Cloud Computing for Smart Grid 488 11.6 Data Storage, Data Access and Data Analysis 488 11.7 The State-of-the-Art Processing Techniques of Big Data 488 11.8 Big Data Meets the Smart Electrical Grid 488 11.9 4Vs of Big Data: Volume, Variety, Value and Velocity 489 11.10 Cloud Computing for Big Data 490 11.11 Big Data for Smart Grid 490 11.12 Information Platforms for Smart Grid 491 Bibliographical Remarks 491 12 Grid Monitoring and State Estimation 493 12.1 Phase Measurement Unit 493 12.2 Optimal PMU Placement 495 12.3 State Estimation 495 12.4 Basics of State Estimation 495 12.5 Evolution of State Estimation 496 12.6 Static State Estimation 497 12.7 Forecasting-Aided State Estimation 500 12.8 Phasor Measurement Units 501 12.9 Distributed System State Estimation 502 12.10 Event-Triggered Approaches to State Estimation 502 12.11 Bad Data Detection 502 12.12 Improved Bad Data Detection 504 12.13 Cyber-Attacks 504 12.14 Line Outage Detection 504 Bibliographical Remarks 504 13 False Data Injection Attacks against State Estimation 505 13.1 State Estimation 505 13.2 False Data Injection Attacks 507 13.3 MMSE State Estimation and Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test 508 13.4 Sparse Recovery from Nonlinear Measurements 512 13.5 Real-Time Intrusion Detection 515 Bibliographical Remarks 515 14 Demand Response 517 14.1 Why Engage Demand? 517 14.2 Optimal Real-time Pricing Algorithms 520 14.3 Transportation Electrification and Vehicle-to-Grid Applications 522 14.4 Grid Storage 522 Bibliographical Remarks 523 Part III Communications and Sensing 525 15 Big Data for Communications 527 15.1 5G and Big Data 527 15.2 5GWireless Communication Networks 527 15.3 Massive Multiple Input, Multiple Output 528 15.4 Free Probability for the Capacity of the Massive MIMO Channel 537 15.5 Spectral Sensing for Cognitive Radio 539 Bibliographical Remarks 539 16 Big Data for Sensing 541 16.1 Distributed Detection and Estimation 541 16.2 Euclidean Random Matrix 547 16.3 Decentralized Computing 548 Appendix A: Some Basic Results on Free Probability 551 Appendix B: Matrix-Valued Random Variables 557 References 567 Index 601

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddresses recent advances from both the clinical and technological perspectives to provide a comprehensive presentation of m-Health This book introduces the concept of m-Health, first coined by Robert S.H. Istepanian in 2003.Trade ReviewTwo of the biggest technology breakthroughs of the 20th century have been mobile communication and the internet, improving accessibility to information and services for everyone. “M-Health” brings the best of these together to support more inclusive and connected healthcare in different ways around the world. The authors guide the readers through the recent origins of m-Health through to today`s examples, showing how m-Health is helping consumers and clinicians across a digital divide in healthcare. The book also illustrates how m-Health systems will help with illness prevention, health system productivity and more effective care for many years to come. Whether in the home or hospital, sports clinic or surgery, this book covers the entire field of m-health. —Dr Mike Short CBE, Vice President, Telefónica A review from the MHealth Journal: http://mhealth.amegroups.com/article/view/14688/14870Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Foreword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii 1 Introduction to m-Health 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 The Concept of m-Health: The Beginnings, 2 1.3 Taxonomy of Telemedicine, Telehealth, e-Health, and m-Health, 5 1.4 m-Health and Digital Ubiquity, 9 1.5 The Paradigm Shift of Mobile Connectivity and m-Health Services, 12 1.6 Impact of m-Health on Cultural, Commercial, and Operational Changes, 16 1.7 Summary, 18 References, 18 2 Smart m-Health Sensing 23 2.1 Introduction, 23 2.2 Fundamentals of m-Health Sensing and a New Taxonomy, 24 2.3 Health and Wellness Monitoring Sensors, 26 2.4 Who is Monitored? 30 2.5 What is Monitored? 31 2.6 Wearable Sensors for m-Health Monitoring, 36 2.7 Wearable Fitness and Health-Tracking Devices, 45 2.8 Design Considerations for Wireless Health Sensing and Monitoring, 47 2.9 Diagnostic Sensors, 52 2.10 Prognostic and Treatment Sensors, 54 2.11 Assistive Sensors, 55 2.12 Summary, 55 References, 58 3 m-Health Computing: m-Health 2.0, Social Networks, Health Apps, Cloud, and Big Health Data 67 3.1 Introduction, 67 3.2 The Evolution of m-Health with Web 2.0 and Medicine 2.0: m-Health 2.0, 68 3.3 Mobile Health Applications (m-Health Apps), 76 3.4 Cloud Computing and m-Health, 90 3.5 m-Health and "Big Data", 101 3.6 Summary, 109 References, 110 4 m-Health and Mobile Communication Systems 119 4.1 Introduction, 119 4.2 Wireless Communications for m-Health: From "Unwired Health" to "4G-Health", 123 4.3 Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks for m-Health, 144 4.4 Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) for m-Health, 147 4.5 Personal Area Networks (PAN) and Body Area Networks (BAN) for m-Health, 151 4.6 Machine-to-Machine Communications and Internet of Things, 166 4.7 Summary, 177 References, 179 5 m-Health Care Models and Applications 189 5.1 Introduction, 189 5.2 Mobile Phone m-Health Systems and Their Impact on Future Healthcare Services, 191 5.3 m-Health for Chronic Disease Management and Monitoring Applications, 200 5.4 Mobile Health for Other Healthcare Services, 229 5.5 Summary, 234 References, 237 6 m-Health and Global Healthcare 251 6.1 Introduction, 251 6.2 m-Health Technologies for Global Health, 254 6.3 Global m-Health Initiatives for the Developing World: Healthcare Challenges and Impacts, 260 6.4 Global m-Health for the Developing World: Barriers and Recommendations, 294 6.5 Summary, 309 References, 311 7 m-Health Ecosystems, Interoperability Standards, and Markets 323 7.1 Introduction, 323 7.2 m-Health Stakeholders and Ecosystems, 325 7.3 m-Health Interoperability and Standardization, 337 7.4 m-Health Markets and Business Models, 345 7.5 Summary, 351 References, 352 8 The Future of m-Health: Progress or Retrogression? 355 8.1 Introduction, 355 8.2 Future Trends of m-Health, 357 8.3 Challenges and Expectations: m-Health "Market" Versus "Science", 366 8.4 Future m-Health Scenarios, 370 8.5 Summary, 374 References, 375 Appendix 379 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book aims to provide insights on new trends in power systems operation and control and to present, in detail, analysis methods of the power system behavior (mainly its dynamics) as well as the mathematical models for the main components of power plants and the control systems implemented in dispatch centers. Particularly, evaluation methods for rotor angle stability and voltage stability as well as control mechanism of the frequency and voltage are described. Illustrative examples and graphical representations help readers across many disciplines acquire ample knowledge on the respective subjects.Trade Review“For power electronics professionals there is great opportunity to assist society energy security needs with innovations in power electronics for reactive power control, power flow control, advanced energy storage technologies for frequency regulation, secure communications, and other aspects of the smart grid.” (IEEE Power Electronics Society, 1 May 2013)Table of ContentsForeword xxiii Acknowledgments xxv Contributors xxvii 1. INTRODUCTION 1Mircea Eremia and Mohammad Shahidehpour PART I POWER SYSTEM MODELING AND CONTROL 7 2. SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR AND INDUCTION MOTOR 9Mircea Eremia and Constantin Bulac 2.1. Theory and Modeling of Synchronous Generator 9 2.2. Theory and Modeling of the Induction Motor 114 3. MODELING THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE CLASSICAL POWER PLANTS 137Mohammad Shahidehpour, Mircea Eremia, and Lucian Toma 3.1. Introduction 137 3.2. Types of Turbines 138 3.3. Thermal Power Plants 143 3.4. Combined-Cycle Power Plants 158 3.5. Nuclear Power Plants 167 3.6. Hydraulic Power Plants 169 4. WIND POWER GENERATION 179Mohammad Shahidehpour and Mircea Eremia 4.1. Introduction 179 4.2. Some Characteristics of Wind Power Generation 181 4.3. State of the Art Technologies 184 4.4. Modeling the Wind Turbine Generators 200 4.5. Fault Ride-Through Capability 223 5. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS CALCULATION 229Nouredine Hadjsaid, Ion TriSstiu, and Lucian Toma 5.1. Introduction 229 5.2. Characteristics of Short-Circuit Currents 232 5.3. Methods of Short-Circuit Currents Calculation 236 5.4. Calculation of Short-Circuit Current Components 264 6. ACTIVE POWER AND FREQUENCY CONTROL 291Les Pereira 6.1. Introduction 291 6.2. Frequency Deviations in Practice 293 6.3. Typical Standards and Policies for "Active Power and Frequency Control" or "Load Frequency Control" 294 6.4. System Modeling, Inertia, Droop, Regulation, and Dynamic Frequency Response 297 6.5. Governor Modeling 302 6.6. AGC Principles and Modeling 328 6.7. Other Topics of Interest Related to Load Frequency Control 336 7. VOLTAGE AND REACTIVE POWER CONTROL 340Sandro Corsi and Mircea Eremia 7.1. Relationship Between Active and Reactive Powers and Voltage 342 7.2. Equipments for Voltage and Reactive Power Control 347 7.3. Grid Voltage and Reactive Power Control Methods 374 7.4. Grid Hierarchical Voltage Regulation 399 7.5. Implementation Study of the Secondary Voltage Regulation in Romania 423 7.6. Examples of Hierarchical Voltage Control in the World 429 PART II POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND PROTECTION 451 8. BACKGROUND OF POWER SYSTEM STABILITY 453S.S. (Mani) Venkata, Mircea Eremia, and Lucian Toma 8.1. Introduction 453 8.2. Classification of Power Systems Stability 453 8.3. Parallelism Between Voltage Stability and Angular Stability 469 8.4. Importance of Security for Power System Stability 469 9. SMALL-DISTURBANCE ANGLE STABILITY AND ELECTROMECHANICAL OSCILLATION DAMPING 477Roberto Marconato and Alberto Berizzi 9.1. Introduction 477 9.2. The Dynamic Matrix 478 9.3. A General Simplified Approach 482 9.4. Major Factors Affecting the Damping of Electromechanical Oscillations 501 9.5. Damping Improvement 546 9.6. Typical Cases of Interarea Or Low-Frequency Electromechanical Oscillations 564 10. TRANSIENT STABILITY 570Nikolai Voropai and Constantin Bulac 10.1. General Aspects 570 10.2. Direct Methods for Transient Stability Assessment 572 10.3. Integration Methods for Transient Stability Assessment 603 10.4. Dynamic Equivalents 614 10.5. Transient Stability Assessment of Large Electric Power Systems 638 10.6. Application 645 11. VOLTAGE STABILITY 657Mircea Eremia and Constantin Bulac 11.1. Introduction 657 11.2. System Characteristics and Load Modeling 658 11.3. Static Aspects of Voltage Stability 667 11.4. Voltage Instability Mechanisms: Interaction Between Electrical Network, Loads, and Control Devices 674 11.5. Voltage Stability Assessment Methods 688 11.6. Voltage Instability Countermeasures 716 11.7. Application 724 12. POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION 737Klaus-Peter Brand and Ivan De Mesmaeker 12.1. Introduction 737 12.2. Summary of IEC 61850 744 12.3. The Protection Chain in Details 746 12.4. Transmission and Distribution Power System Structures 753 12.5. Properties of the Three-Phase Systems Relevant for Protection 755 12.6. Protection Functions Sorted According to the Objects Protected 759 12.7. From Single Protection Functions to System Protection 773 12.8. Conclusions 780 PART III GRID BLACKOUTS AND RESTORATION PROCESS 787 13. MAJOR GRID BLACKOUTS: ANALYSIS, CLASSIFICATION, AND PREVENTION 789Yvon Besanger, Mircea Eremia, and Nikolai Voropai 13.1. Introduction 789 13.2. Description of Some Previous Blackouts 792 13.3. Analysis of Blackouts 835 13.4. Economical and Social Effects 847 13.5. Recommendations for Preventing Blackouts 849 13.6. On Some Defense and Restoration Actions 850 13.7. Survivability/vulnerability of Electric Power Systems 856 13.8. Conclusions 860 14. RESTORATION PROCESSES AFTER BLACKOUTS 864Alberto Borghetti, Carlo Alberto Nucci, and Mario Paolone 14.1. Introduction 864 14.2. Overview of The Restoration Process 865 14.3. Black-Start-Up Capabilities of Thermal Power Plant: Modeling and Computer Simulations 869 14.4. Description of Computer Simulators 888 14.5. Concluding Remarks 896 15. COMPUTER SIMULATION OF SCALE-BRIDGING TRANSIENTS IN POWER SYSTEMS 900Kai Strunz and Feng Gao 15.1. Bridging of Instantaneous and Phasor Signals 901 15.2. Network Modeling 903 15.3. Modeling of Power System Components 909 15.4. Application: Simulation of Blackout 923 References 926 Index 929

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding an extensive overview of the radio resource management problem in femtocell networks, this invaluable book considers both code division multiple access femtocells and orthogonal frequency-division multiple access femtocells.Table of ContentsPREFACE xv CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF MULTI-TIER CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS 1 CHAPTER 2 RESOURCE ALLOCATION APPROACHES IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS 31 CHAPTER 3 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN OFDMA-BASED MULTI-TIER CELLULAR NETWORKS 51 CHAPTER 4 RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR CLUSTERED SMALL CELLS IN TWO-TIER OFDMA NETWORKS 84 CHAPTER 5 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN TWO-TIER NETWORKS USING FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY REUSE 102 CHAPTER 6 CALL ADMISSION CONTROL IN FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY REUSE-BASED TWO-TIER NETWORKS 123 CHAPTER 7 GAME THEORETIC APPROACHES FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS 155 CHAPTER 8 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN CDMA-BASED MULTI-TIER HETNETS 206 CHAPTER 9 SELF-ORGANIZING SMALL CELL NETWORKS 250 CHAPTER 10 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS WITH COGNITIVE SMALL CELLS 302 INDEX 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive reference book codifying the various standards releases for High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) wireless technology HSPA evolution has maintained its prominence through Releases 7-11 but the evolution is coming to an end with Release 12, with the focus moving to LTE.Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Introduction 1 Harri Holma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 HSPA Global Deployments 1 1.3 Mobile Devices 3 1.4 Traffic Growth 3 1.5 HSPA Technology Evolution 5 1.6 HSPA Optimization Areas 7 1.7 Summary 7 2 HSDPA and HSUPA in Release 5 and 6 9 Antti Toskala 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 3GPP Standardization of HSDPA and HSUPA 9 2.3 HSDPA Technology Key Characteristics 10 2.4 HSDPA Mobility 16 2.5 HSDPA UE Capability 17 2.6 HSUPA Technology Key Characteristics 17 2.7 HSUPA Mobility 22 2.8 HSUPA UE Capability 23 2.9 HSPA Architecture Evolution 23 2.10 Conclusions 24 References 24 3 Multicarrier and Multiantenna MIMO 27 Antti Toskala, Jeroen Wigard, Matthias Hesse, Ryszard Dokuczal, and Maciej Januszewski 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Dual-Cell Downlink and Uplink 27 3.2.1 Dual-Cell Downlink 28 3.2.2 Dual-Cell HSUPA 32 3.3 Four-Carrier HSDPA and Beyond 33 3.4 Multiband HSDPA 36 3.5 Downlink MIMO 38 3.5.1 Space Time Transmit Diversity – STTD 39 3.5.2 Closed-Loop Mode 1 Transmit Diversity 39 3.5.3 2 × 2 MIMO and TxAA 40 3.5.4 4-Branch MIMO 42 3.6 Uplink MIMO and Uplink Closed-Loop Transmit Diversity 46 3.6.1 Uplink MIMO Channel Architecture 47 3.6.2 Scheduling and Rank Selection with Uplink MIMO 49 3.6.3 Uplink MIMO Performance Evaluation 50 3.7 Conclusions 52 References 52 4 Continuous Packet Connectivity and High Speed Common Channels 53 Harri Holma and Karri Ranta-aho 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Continuous Packet Connectivity (CPC) 54 4.2.1 Uplink DTX 55 4.2.2 Downlink DRX 58 4.2.3 HS-SCCH-Less Transmission 59 4.3 High Speed FACH 61 4.4 High Speed RACH 63 4.5 High Speed FACH and RACH Enhancements 66 4.6 Fast Dormancy 67 4.7 Uplink Interference Reduction 68 4.8 Terminal Power Consumption Minimization 72 4.9 Signaling Reduction 73 4.10 Latency Optimization 74 4.11 Summary 75 References 75 5 HSDPA Multiflow 77 Thomas Höhne, Karri Ranta-aho, Alexander Sayenko, and Antti Toskala 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 Multiflow Overview 77 5.2.1 Multiflow Principle 78 5.2.2 Multiflow Configurations 78 5.3 Multiflow Protocol Stack 80 5.4 Multiflow Impacts on UE Architecture 80 5.5 Uplink Feedback for Multiflow 81 5.5.1 HS-DPCCH Structure with Multiflow 81 5.5.2 Dynamic Carrier Activation 84 5.5.3 Timing of Uplink Feedback 84 5.5.4 HS-DPCCH Power Levels 86 5.6 RLC Impact 87 5.6.1 RLC Timer_Reordering 87 5.6.2 RLC Reset 88 5.7 Iub/Iur Enhancements 89 5.7.1 Flow Control 89 5.7.2 Multiflow Extensions 90 5.8 Multiflow Combined with Other Features 91 5.8.1 Downlink MIMO 91 5.8.2 Uplink Closed-Loop Transmit Diversity and Uplink MIMO 91 5.8.3 DTX/DRX 92 5.9 Setting Up Multiflow 93 5.10 Robustness 94 5.10.1 Robustness for RRC Signaling 94 5.10.2 Radio Link Failure 94 5.10.3 Robustness for User Plane Data 96 5.11 Multiflow Performance 96 5.11.1 Multiflow Performance in Macro Networks 96 5.11.2 Multiflow Performance with HetNets 96 5.12 Multiflow and Other Multipoint Transmission Techniques 100 5.13 Conclusions 100 References 100 6 Voice Evolution 103 Harri Holma and Karri Ranta-aho 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Voice Quality with AMR Wideband 103 6.3 Voice Capacity with Low Rate AMR 106 6.4 VoIP Over HSPA 107 6.5 Circuit-Switched Voice Over HSPA 111 6.6 Voice Over HSPA Mobility 112 6.7 Circuit-Switched Fallback 114 6.8 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity 115 6.9 Summary 116 References 116 7 Heterogeneous Networks 117 Harri Holma and Fernando Sanchez Moya 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Small Cell Drivers 117 7.3 Base Station Categories 118 7.4 Small Cell Dominance Areas 119 7.5 HetNet Uplink–Downlink Imbalance 122 7.6 HetNet Capacity and Data Rates 124 7.7 HetNet Field Measurements 128 7.8 Femto Cells 130 7.9 WLAN Interworking 133 7.9.1 Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) 133 7.9.2 Hotspot 2.0 135 7.9.3 Differences between ANDSF and Hotspot 2.0 136 7.10 Summary 136 References 137 8 Advanced UE and BTS Algorithms 139 Antti Toskala and Hisashi Onozawa 8.1 Introduction 139 8.2 Advanced UE Receivers 139 8.3 BTS Scheduling Alternatives 143 8.4 BTS Interference Cancellation 145 8.5 Further Advanced UE and BTS Algorithms 149 8.6 Conclusions 150 References 151 9 IMT-Advanced Performance Evaluation 153 Karri Ranta-aho and Antti Toskala 9.1 Introduction 153 9.2 ITU-R Requirements for IMT-Advanced 153 9.3 3GPP Features to Consider in Meeting the IMT-Advanced Requirements 155 9.4 Performance Evaluation 157 9.4.1 Eight-Carrier HSDPA 157 9.4.2 Four-Antenna MIMO for HSDPA 159 9.4.3 Uplink Beamforming, MIMO and 64QAM 160 9.4.4 HSPA+ Multiflow 162 9.4.5 Performance in Different ITU-R Scenarios 163 9.4.6 Latency and Handover Interruption Analysis 164 9.5 Conclusions 168 References 168 10 HSPA+ Performance 169 Pablo Tapia and Brian Olsen 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 Test Tools and Methodology 170 10.3 Single-Carrier HSPA+ 173 10.3.1 Test Scenarios 173 10.3.2 Latency Measurements 174 10.3.3 Good Signal Strength Scenario 175 10.3.4 Mid Signal Strength Scenario 177 10.3.5 Poor Signal Strength Scenario 179 10.3.6 Summary of Stationary Tests 182 10.3.7 Drive Test Performance of Single-Carrier HSPA+ 183 10.4 Dual-Cell HSPA+ 188 10.4.1 Stationary Performance 189 10.4.2 Dual-Carrier Drive Performance 192 10.4.3 Impact of Vendor Implementation 196 10.5 Analysis of Other HSPA Features 198 10.5.1 64 QAM Gains 198 10.5.2 UE Advanced Receiver Field Results 200 10.5.3 2 × 2 MIMO 203 10.5.4 Quality of Service (QoS) 206 10.6 Comparison of HSPA+ with LTE 209 10.7 Summary 211 References 212 11 Network Planning 213 Brian Olsen, Pablo Tapia, Jussi Reunanen, and Harri Holma 11.1 Introduction 213 11.2 Radio Frequency Planning 213 11.2.1 Link Budget 215 11.2.2 Antenna and Power Planning 219 11.2.3 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) Tools 222 11.2.4 Neighbor Planning 223 11.3 Multilayer Management in HSPA 224 11.3.1 Layering Strategy within Single Band 225 11.3.2 Layering Strategy with Multiple UMTS Bands 230 11.3.3 Summary 233 11.4 RAN Capacity Planning 233 11.4.1 Discussion on Capacity Triggers 234 11.4.2 Effect of Voice/Data Load 237 11.4.3 Uplink Noise Discussion 238 11.4.4 Sector Dimensioning 240 11.4.5 RNC Dimensioning 242 11.5 Packet Core and Transport Planning 243 11.5.1 Backhaul Dimensioning 244 11.6 Spectrum Refarming 246 11.6.1 Introduction 246 11.6.2 UMTS Spectrum Requirements 247 11.6.3 GSM Features for Refarming 249 11.6.4 Antenna Sharing Solutions 249 11.7 Summary 250 References 251 12 Radio Network Optimization 253 Pablo Tapia and Carl Williams 12.1 Introduction 253 12.2 Optimization of the Radio Access Network Parameters 254 12.2.1 Optimization of Antenna Parameters 255 12.2.2 Optimization of Power Parameters 257 12.2.3 Neighbor List Optimization 262 12.2.4 HS Cell Change Optimization 265 12.2.5 IRAT Handover Optimization 268 12.2.6 Optimization of Radio State Transitions 271 12.2.7 Uplink Noise Optimization 275 12.3 Optimization Tools 281 12.3.1 Geolocation 284 12.3.2 User Tracing (Minimization of Drive Tests) 285 12.3.3 Self Organizing Network (SON) Tools 286 12.4 Summary 292 Reference 292 13 Smartphone Performance 293 Pablo Tapia, Michael Thelander, Timo Halonen, Jeff Smith, and Mika Aalto 13.1 Introduction 293 13.2 Smartphone Traffic Analysis 294 13.3 Smartphone Data Consumption 297 13.4 Smartphone Signaling Analysis 299 13.4.1 Smartphone Profiling 301 13.4.2 Ranking Based on Key Performance Indicators 302 13.4.3 Test Methodology 303 13.4.4 KPIs Analyzed during Profiling 304 13.4.5 Use Case Example: Analysis of Signaling by Various Mobile OSs 306 13.5 Smartphone Performance 308 13.5.1 User Experience KPIs 310 13.5.2 Battery Performance 311 13.5.3 Coverage Limits for Different Services 313 13.5.4 Effect of TCP Performance 315 13.5.5 Web Browsing Performance 318 13.5.6 Video Streaming 321 13.6 Use Case Study: Analysis of Smartphone User Experience in the US 330 13.7 Summary 334 References 335 14 Multimode Multiband Terminal Design Challenges 337 Jean-Marc Lemenager, Luigi Di Capua, Victor Wilkerson, Mikaël Guenais, Thierry Meslet, and Laurent Noël 14.1 Cost Reduction in Multimode Multiband Terminals 340 14.1.1 Evolution of Silicon Area and Component Count 340 14.1.2 Transceiver Architecture Evolutions 342 14.1.3 RF Front End 350 14.2 Power Consumption Reduction in Terminals 369 14.2.1 Smartphone Power Consumption 369 14.2.2 Application Engines 371 14.2.3 Power Amplifiers 378 14.2.4 Continuous Packet Connectivity 382 14.3 Conclusion 387 References 389 15 LTE Interworking 393 Harri Holma and Hannu Raassina 15.1 Introduction 393 15.2 Packet Data Interworking 394 15.2.1 Example Trace of 3G to LTE Cell Reselection 398 15.2.2 Example Trace of LTE to 3G Redirection 400 15.3 Circuit-Switched Fallback 406 15.3.1 Example Circuit-Switched Fallback with Location Area Update 410 15.3.2 Example Circuit-Switched Fallback without Location Area Update 413 15.4 Matching of LTE and 3G Coverage Areas 415 15.5 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) 417 15.6 Summary 419 References 419 16 HSPA Evolution Outlook 421 Antti Toskala and Karri Ranta-aho 16.1 Introduction 421 16.2 HSPA-LTE and WLAN Interworking 421 16.3 Scalable Bandwidth UMTS 423 16.4 DCH Enhancements 425 16.5 HSUPA Enhancements 427 16.6 Heterogenous Networks 428 16.7 Other Areas of Improvement for Release 12 and Beyond 430 16.8 Conclusions 430 References 431 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis valuable resource offers a wealth of practical and conceptual guidance to all those engaged in struggles for social justice around the world. It explains in accessible language and painstaking detail how to deploy and to understand the tools of media and communication in advancing the goals of social, cultural, and political change.Trade Review“As a whole, this collection provides an international perspective on development communication and social change, making it a strong addition to courses on activist rhetoric, development communication, and international communication.” (Technical Communication, 1 February 2015) Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors viii Series Editor’s Preface xiii Acknowledgmentsxiv Introduction 1 Karin Gwinn Wilkins, Thomas Tufte, and Rafael Obregon Part I Communicating Development and Social Change 5 1 Development Communication and Social Change in Historical Context 7 Pradip Ninan Thomas 2 Globalization and Development 20 Toby Miller 3 Political Economy of Development 40 James Pamment 4 Advocacy Communication 57 Karin Gwinn Wilkins 5 Equality and Human Rights 72 Cees J. Hamelink 6 Public Health 92 Colin Tinei Chasi 7 Indigenous Communication: From Multiculturalism to Interculturality 108 Alfonso Gumucio-Dagron 8 Communication, Development, and the Natural Environment 125 Elske van de Fliert 9 Emerging Issues in Communicating Development and Social Change 138 Karin Gwinn Wilkins Part II Developing Strategic Communication for Social Change 145 10 The Strategic Politics of Participatory Communication 147 Silvio Waisbord 11 Rethinking Entertainment-Education for Development and Social Change 168 Rafael Obregon and Thomas Tufte 12 Storytelling for Social Change 189 Kate Winskell and Daniel Enger 13 Theater for Development 207 David Kerr 14 Media Development 226 James Deane 15 Economics and Communication for Development and Social Change 242 Emile G. McAnany 16 Peace Communication for Social Change: Dealing with Violent Conflict 259 Ana Fernández Viso 17 Social and Behavior Change Communication 278 Neill McKee, Antje Becker-Benton, and Emily Bockh 18 A Participatory Framework for Researching and Evaluating Communication for Development and Social Change 298 Jo Tacchi and June Lennie 19 Emerging Issues in Strategic Communication for Development and Social Change 321 Rafael Obregon Part III Activist Approaches for Development and Social Change 329 20 Social Movement Media in the Process of Constructive Social Change 331 John D.H. Downing 21 Transnational Civil Society and Social Movements 351 Anastasia Kavada 22 Communication for Transparency and Social Accountability 370 Norbert Wildermuth 23 Citizens’ Journalism: Shifting Public Spheres from Elites to Citizens 393 Clemencia Rodríguez and Ana María Miralles 24 Citizens’ Media: Citizens’ Watchdog Groups and Observatories 411 Rosa María Alfaro Moreno 25 Community Radio 426 Tanja Bosch 26 Youth-Generated Media 439 Joe F. Khalil 27 Video for Change 453 Tina Askanius 28 Emerging Issues in Activism and Social Change Communication 471 Thomas Tufte Index 478

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive summary of theoretical and practical developments in LTE Heterogeneous Networks The last decade has witnessed the proliferation of mobile broadband data and the trend is likely to increase in the coming years. Current cellular networks are ill equipped to deal with this surge in demand. To satisfy user demand and maximize profits, a new paradigm to operate networks is needed. Heterogeneous networks, that deploy an overlay of small cells with limited coverage and transmit power, over a macro coverage area is the solution by providing capacity and coverage where it is needed. This book presents a comprehensive overview of small cell based heterogeneous networks within the framework of 3GPP LTE-Advanced which is the major enabler of current and future heterogeneous networks. The book first establishes the basics of LTE standards 8 -10. Wherever relevant, the underlying theory of wireless communications is explained and the signaling and protoTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii List of Acronyms xix 1 An Introduction to Heterogeneous Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Heterogeneous Network Deployments 3 1.2.1 Distributed Antenna Systems 3 1.2.2 Public Access Picocells/Metrocells 4 1.2.3 Consumer-Grade Femtocells 4 1.2.4 WiFi Systems 5 1.3 Features of Heterogeneous Networks 5 1.3.1 Association and Load Balancing 5 1.3.2 Interference Management 6 1.3.3 Self-Organizing Networks 6 1.3.4 Mobility Management 7 1.4 Evolution of Cellular Technology and Standards 7 1.4.1 3GPP Standardization Process 9 References 10 Part I OVERVIEW 2 Fundamentals of LTE 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 LTE Core Network 17 2.2.1 Control Plane 18 2.2.2 User Plane 19 2.2.3 Practical Implementations of the Core Network 19 2.3 LTE Radio Access Network 20 2.3.1 Control Plane 20 2.3.2 User Plane 23 2.4 Connectivity Among eNodeBs: The X2 Interface 24 2.4.1 Load- and Interference-Related Information 26 2.4.2 Handover-Related Information 26 2.5 Technologies in LTE 27 2.5.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 27 2.5.2 Multiple Antenna Communications 36 References 42 3 LTE Signal Structure and Physical Channels 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 LTE Signal Structure 45 3.3 Introduction to LTE Physical Channels and Reference Signals 48 3.4 Resource Block Assignment 51 3.5 Downlink Physical Channels 54 3.5.1 Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) 55 3.5.2 Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) 57 3.5.3 Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH) 58 3.5.4 Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH) 58 3.5.5 Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH) 59 3.5.6 Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) 60 3.6 Uplink Physical Channels 67 3.6.1 Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) 67 3.6.2 Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) 68 3.6.3 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) 70 References 71 4 Physical Layer Signal Processing in LTE 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Downlink Synchronization Signals 73 4.2.1 Primary Synchronization Signal 74 4.2.2 Secondary Synchronization Signal 76 4.3 Reference Signals 77 4.3.1 Downlink Reference Signals 77 4.3.2 Uplink Reference Signals 84 4.4 Channel Estimation and Feedback 85 4.4.1 Basics of Link Adaptation 85 4.4.2 Feedback for MIMO OFDM Channels 88 4.4.3 New Features in LTE-Advanced 92 4.5 Design Paradigm of LTE Signaling 94 4.6 Scheduling and Resource Allocation 94 4.6.1 Scheduling Algorithms 96 4.6.2 Inter-eNodeB Coordination for Resource Allocation in LTE 98 References 100 Part II INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION 5 Release 10 Enhanced ICIC 103 5.1 Introduction 103 5.2 Typical Deployment Scenarios 103 5.2.1 Macro–Pico Deployment Scenario 104 5.2.2 Macro–Femto Deployment Scenario 107 5.3 Time Domain Techniques 110 5.3.1 Almost Blank Subframe 110 5.3.2 ABS Use Cases 113 5.3.3 UE Measurement and Reporting 116 5.3.4 Backhaul Support 118 5.3.5 Simulation Results 119 5.4 Power Control Techniques 123 5.4.1 Target Scenario 123 5.4.2 Power Control Schemes 124 5.4.3 Results from Realistic Deployments 125 5.5 Carrier Aggregation-Based eICIC 127 References 130 6 Release 11 Further Enhanced ICIC: Transceiver Processing 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Typical Deployment Scenarios 133 6.3 Techniques for Mitigating CRS Interference 136 6.3.1 Receiver-Based Techniques 136 6.3.2 Transmitter-Based Techniques 140 6.4 Weak Cell Detection 142 6.5 Non-Zero-Power ABS 144 References 147 7 Release 11 Further Enhanced ICIC: Remaining Topics 149 7.1 Carrier-Based Interference Coordination 149 7.1.1 Operational Carrier Selection 150 7.1.2 Primary and Secondary Cell Selection 153 7.2 Enhanced PDCCH for Interference Coordination 154 References 159 Part III COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION RECEPTION 8 Downlink CoMP: Signal Processing 163 8.1 Introduction 163 8.2 CoMP Scenarios in 3GPP 164 8.2.1 Homogeneous Networks with Intra-Site CoMP 164 8.2.2 Homogeneous Networks with High-Power RRHs 165 8.2.3 Heterogeneous Networks with Low-Power RRHs with Cell IDs Different from the Macro 165 8.2.4 Heterogeneous Networks with Low-Power RRHs with Cell IDs the Same as the Macro 166 8.3 CoMP Sets 167 8.3.1 RRM Measurement Set/CoMP Resource Management Set 167 8.3.2 CoMP Measurement Set 168 8.3.3 CoMP Cooperating Set 169 8.4 CoMP Transmission in 3GPP 169 8.4.1 Coordinated Scheduling/Beamforming 169 8.4.2 Dynamic Point Selection 172 8.4.3 Joint Transmission 177 8.5 Comparison of Different CoMP Categories 180 References 182 9 Downlink CoMP: Standardization Impact 185 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 Modification of Reference Signals 185 9.2.1 Modifications in CSI-RS 185 9.2.2 Modifications in DMRS 186 9.3 CSI Processes 189 9.3.1 UE Processing Complexity and CSI Reference Resources 191 9.3.2 Inheritance and Reference Processes 192 9.4 PDSCH Rate Matching 193 9.5 Quasi-Co-Location of Antenna Ports 195 9.5.1 Quasi-Co-Location Between the Same Antenna Ports 197 9.5.2 Quasi-Co-Location Between Different Antenna Ports 198 9.6 New Transmission Mode and DCI Format 200 9.7 Backhaul Support for CoMP 201 9.8 Summary 203 References 203 Part IV UPCOMING TECHNOLOGIES 10 Dense Small Cell Deployments 207 10.1 Introduction 207 10.2 Evolution of Small Cells 207 10.2.1 Deployment Scenarios 209 10.3 Efficient Operation of Small Cells 212 10.3.1 Dual Connectivity 214 10.3.2 ICIC Mechanism 216 10.3.3 Small Cell Discovery 220 10.4 Control Signaling Enhancement 223 10.4.1 Multi-Subframe Scheduling 223 10.4.2 Cross-Subframe Scheduling 224 10.5 Reference Signal Overhead Reduction 225 10.5.1 Downlink DMRS 225 10.5.2 Uplink DMRS 227 References 228 11 TD-LTE Enhancements for Small Cells 231 11.1 Enhancements for Dynamic TDD 231 11.1.1 TDD UL/DL Reconfiguration Scenarios in 3GPP 232 11.1.2 Interference Mitigation Schemes 234 11.2 FDD-TDD Joint Operation 239 11.2.1 Deployment Scenarios 240 11.2.2 Issues and Potential Solutions 241 References 243 12 Full Dimension MIMO 245 12.1 Introduction 245 12.2 Antenna Systems Architecture: Passive and Active 245 12.3 Antenna Patterns 248 12.3.1 Passive Antenna Element Pattern 248 12.3.2 Active Antenna Systems 250 12.3.3 AAS with Additional Mechanical Tilt 253 12.3.4 Effect of Multipath Fading Channels 253 12.4 FD-MIMO Deployment Scenarios 254 12.4.1 UE-Specific FD-MIMO 254 12.4.2 Cell-Specific FD-MIMO 255 12.4.3 System-Specific FD-MIMO 255 12.5 Conclusion 256 References 256 13 Future Trends in Heterogeneous Networks 257 13.1 Summary 257 13.2 Small Cells and Cloud RAN 258 13.3 Small Cells, Millimeter Wave Communications and Massive MIMO 259 13.4 Small Cells and Big Data 260 13.5 Concluding Remarks 260 References 260 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisFast-Tracking Your Career provides engineers and IT professionals with a complete set of soft skills they can use to become more effective on the job and gain recognition from management and colleagues. The 11 core skills covered here are accompanied by more than 40 detailed guidelines on how to master those skills. The book offers first-rate advice on how to go about acquiring communication skills, people skills, presentation skills, time management skills, and others. Specific examples about current situations are discussed, exploring the impact of the Facebook phenomenon and the subprime mortgage crisis.Visit the author''s website for more information:www.FastTrackingCareers.comTrade Review“Whether you're an engineer, IT professional, or other technical professional, Fast-Tracking Your Career helps you advance your career by developing business and personal skills that are as sharp as your technical abilities.” (New Tech Review, 1 June 2013)Table of ContentsForeword xiii Dr. Sorel Reisman Guest Introduction i xv Dr. Simon Y. Liu Guest Introduction ii xvii Dr. Arnold "Jay" Bragg Guest Introduction iii xix Frank E. Ferrante Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxiii About the Author xxv Introduction and Summary 1 Engineers Are Potentially Better Positioned as Executives, 1 Categorization of Smart Soft Skills, 2 Rules for Mastering Smart Soft Skills, 3 Relationships among the Soft Skills, 8 PART ONE: Communications: The Absolutely Necessary Chapter 1 Communications Smart 13 Rule 1: Being always ready for elevator pitches/speeches, 14 Rule 2: Mastering a presentation by mastering the onset, 16 Rule 3: Using three diagrams to simplify complexity, 18 Rule 4: Sizing up and resonating with the audience, 20 Rule 5: Being careful of careless comments, 23 Rule 6: Using plain language, 24 Rule 7: Using jokes and self-deprecating humor, 26 PART TWO: Dealing with People: The Essential Chapter 2 People Smart 31 Rule 1: Getting accepted by accepting others fi rst, 32 Rule 2: Winning by understanding both ourselves and our counterparts, 34 Rule 3: Being aggressive by being nonaggressive, 36 Rule 4: Gaining by giving, 38 Rule 5: Successful networking by networking less, 41 Rule 6: Being heard by listening, 46 Chapter 3 Marketing Smart 49 Rule 1: Sizing up and resonating with our "customers", 51 Rule 2: Putting a positive spin on our "product", 53 Rule 3: Making a convincing presentation with a well-crafted presentation, 53 Rule 4: Inciting enthusiasm with enthusiasm, 54 A Marketing Role Model: Steve Jobs (and His Embodiment, Apple), 55 PART THREE: Dealing with the Self: The Basic Chapter 4 Work Smart 59 Rule 1: Achieving outstanding results by not seeking perfection, 60 Rule 2: Avoiding blunders of overconfi dence, 62 Rule 3: Focusing on self-examination, not on blaming others, when things gone awry, 63 Chapter 5 Time Smart 65 Rule 1: Investing time with the same zeal as venture capitalists investing money, 66 Rule 2: Killing two birds with one stone, 68 Rule 3: Minding ROI, 70 Rule 4: Making nonproductive time productive, 71 Rule 5: Turning spare time into opportunities, 73 Rule 6: Keeping the mind sharp by taking catnaps, 74 Chapter 6 Career Smart 77 Rule 1: Opting to be a big fi sh in a small pond, 78 Rule 2: Hopping to a more opportune pond at opportune moments, 80 Rule 3: Never polishing a sneaker, 84 Rule 4: Making a good lasting impression by making a good first impression, 86 PART FOUR: Dealing with the Boss: Earning Trust and Recognition Chapter 7 Job-Interview Smart 89 Rule 1: Being well prepared by collecting relevant information, 90 Rule 2: Putting a positive spin on our qualifi cations, 91 Rule 3: Preparing targeted elevator pitches/speeches, 91 Rule 4: Sizing up and resonating with the interviewer, 92 Rule 5: Winning interviewers’ confi dence in us by exhibiting confidence, 93 Rule 6: Avoiding gaffes by avoiding overconfi dence, 93 Stories of Failed Interviews, 93 A Successful Interview Story, 98 Chapter 8 Boss Smart 101 Rule 1: Winning trust by showing loyalty, 102 Rule 2: Gaining gratitude by sharing credit and taking blame, 104 Rule 3: Being astute by watching for nuances, 105 Rule 4: Being proactive and farsighted, 107 Rule 5: Showing enthusiasm for challenging assignments, 108 PART FIVE: Dealing with Staff: Inspiring Loyalty and Productivity Chapter 9 Motivating Smart 111 Rule 1: Winning loyalty by being loyal, 112 Rule 2: Getting credit by not taking credit, 114 Rule 3: Motivating by complimenting, 115 Chapter 10 Delegating Smart 117 Rule 1: Getting more done by doing less, 118 Rule 2: Delegating successfully by matching tasks with staff, 119 Rule 3: Making controversial decisions by not making them, 122 PART SIX: Being Visionary: Leading to the C-Suite Chapter 11 Beyond the Box 127 Rule 1: Examining the big picture to identify opportunities, 128 Rule 2: Forming a visionary plan, 131 Rule 3: Marketing the vision, 131 Successful Fast-Tracking Stories, 132 Final Thoughts 137 The Book's Objective, 137 "Soft Skills" and "Rules" Outside the Scope of This Book, 137 High Achievers' Soft Skills, 139 Personal Career Goals, 140 Appendix Tables for Principles, Strategies, and Rules 141 Table A.1 Principles and Strategies, 141 Table A.2 Communications Smart, 142 Table A.3 People Smart, 143 Table A.4 Marketing Smart, 144 Table A.5 Work Smart, 145 Table A.6 Time Smart, 146 Table A.7 Career Smart, 146 Table A.8 Job-Interview Smart, 147 Table A.9 Boss Smart, 148 Table A.10 Motivating Smart, 149 Table A.11 Delegating Smart, 149 Table A.12 Beyond the Box, 150 Abbreviations 151 Index 153

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book is a review of essential skills that an entry-level or experienced engineer must be able to demonstrate on a job interview and perform when hired. It will help engineers prepare for interviews by demonstrating application of basic principles to practical problems.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Author xv About the Reviewers xvii Note to Instructors xxi 1 HOW TO DESIGN RESISTIVE CIRCUITS 1 1.1 Design of a Resistive Thevenin Source 2 1.2 Design of a Coupling Circuit 4 1.3 Design of a Pi Attenuator 8 Problems 14 References 17 2 HOW TO PREVENT A POWER TRANSISTOR FROM OVERHEATING 19 2.1 Electrical Model for Heat Transfer 20 2.2 Using Manufacturer’s Data for Thermal Analysis 23 2.3 Forced-Air Cooling 26 2.4 Dynamic Response of a Thermal System 27 Problems 30 Reference 32 3 HOW TO ANALYZE A CIRCUIT 33 3.1 Frequency Response of a Transfer Function 34 3.2 Frequency Response and Impedance of Simple Circuits 38 3.3 Frequency Response for Ladder Networks 51 3.4 Generalized Technique for Determining Frequency Response 54 Problems 58 References 60 4 HOW TO USE STATISTICS TO ENSURE A MANUFACTURABLE DESIGN 61 4.1 Independent Component Failures 62 4.2 Using the Gaussian Distribution 63 4.3 Setting a Manufacturing Test Limit 68 4.4 Procuring a Custom Component 71 Problems 76 References 77 5 HOW TO DESIGN A FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEM 79 5.1 Intuitive Description of a Control System 80 5.2 Review of Control System Operation 81 5.3 Performance of Control Systems 84 5.4 First-Order Control System Design 84 5.5 Second-Order Control System Design 88 5.6 Circuit Realization of a Second-Order Control System 94 5.7 First-Order Discrete Control System 95 Problems 101 References 102 6 HOW TO WORK WITH OP-AMP CIRCUITS 103 6.1 The Ideal Op-Amp 104 6.2 Practical Op-Amps 108 6.2.1 Effect of Input Offset Voltage 108 6.2.2 Noise Contribution from Op-Amp Circuits 110 6.2.3 Dynamic Characteristics of Op-Amp Circuits 113 6.2.4 Effect of Capacitive Loading 116 6.2.5 A Nagging Issue 118 Problems 119 References 121 7 HOW TO DESIGN ANALOG FILTERS 123 7.1 Passive Versus Active Filters 124 7.2 The Lowpass RC Filter 125 7.3 Filter Response Characteristics 129 7.4 Specification of Filter Type 131 7.5 Generalized Filter Design Procedure 132 7.6 Design of Active Lowpass Filters 136 7.7 Design of Passive RF Filters 139 Problems 146 References 148 8 HOW TO DESIGN DIGITAL FILTERS 149 8.1 Review of Sampling 150 8.2 Using the z-Transform to Determine the Transfer Function and Frequency Response of Digital Filters 155 8.3 FIR and IIR Digital Filters 161 8.3.1 FIR Filters 162 8.3.2 IIR Filters 165 8.3.3 Comparisons between FIR and IIR Filters 167 8.4 Design of Simple and Practical Digital Filters 168 8.4.1 Averaging Lowpass FIR Filter 168 8.4.2 Lowpass FIR/IIR Filter 171 Problems 177 References 181 9 HOW TO WORK WITH RF SIGNALS 183 9.1 Energy Transfer 185 9.2 Signal Reflections 187 9.3 Effect of Signal Reflections on Digital Signals 190 9.4 Effect of Signal Reflections on Narrowband Signals 195 9.5 The Smith Chart 198 9.6 Using the Smith Chart to Display Impedance Versus Frequency 205 9.7 Final Comments Regarding the Smith Chart 205 Problems 206 References 209 10 GETTING A JOB—KEEPING A JOB—ENJOYING YOUR WORK 211 10.1 Getting a Job 212 10.1.1 Getting an Interview 214 10.1.2 Preparing for an Interview 216 10.1.3 The Interview 217 10.1.4 Selecting the Right Offer 220 10.2 Keeping a Job 221 10.2.1 The First Year 221 10.2.2 After the First Year 224 10.3 Enjoying Your Work 227 Afterword 231 Answers to Problems 233 Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the theories and applications of determining the position of an object in space through the use of satellites As the importance of space reconnaissance technology intensifies, more and more countries are investing money in building their own space reconnaissance satellites. Due to the secrecy and sensitivity of the operations, it is hard to find published papers and journals on the topic outside of military and governmental agencies. This book aims to fill the gap by presenting the various applications and basic principles of a very modern technology. The space electronic reconnaissance system in mono/multi-satellite platforms is a critical feature which can be used for detection, localization, tracking or identification of the various kinds of signal sources from radar, communication or navigation systems. Localization technology in space electronic reconnaissance uses single or multiple satellite receivers which receive signals from radarTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv Acronyms xvii 1 Introduction to Space Electronic Reconnaissance Geolocation 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Overview of Space Electronic Reconnaissance Geolocation Technology 3 1.2.1 Geolocation of an Emitter on the Earth 3 1.2.2 Tracking of an Emitter on a Satellite 8 1.2.3 Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 9 1.3 Structure of a Typical SER System 9 References 11 2 Fundamentals of Satellite Orbit and Geolocation 13 2.1 An Introduction to the Satellite and Its Orbit 13 2.1.1 Kepler’s Three Laws 13 2.1.2 Classification of Satellite Orbits 15 2.2 Orbit Parameters and State of Satellite 18 2.2.1 Orbit Elements of a Satellite 18 2.2.2 Definition of Several Arguments of Perigee and Their Correlations 20 2.3 Definition of Coordinate Systems and Their Transformations 21 2.3.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems 21 2.3.2 Transformation between Coordinate Systems 25 2.4 Spherical Model of the Earth for Geolocation 27 2.4.1 Regular Spherical Model for Geolocation 27 2.4.2 Ellipsoid Model of the Earth 27 2.5 Coverage Area of a Satellite 30 2.5.1 Approximate Calculation Method for the Coverage Area 30 2.5.2 Examples of Calculation of the Coverage Area 31 2.5.3 Side Reconnaissance Coverage Area 33 2.6 Fundamentals of Geolocation 33 2.6.1 Spatial Geolocation Plane 34 2.6.2 Spatial Line of Position (LOP) 34 2.7 Measurement Index of Geolocation Errors 38 2.7.1 General Definition of Error 38 2.7.2 Geometrical Dilution of Precision (GDOP) 40 2.7.3 Graphical Representation of the Geolocation Error 40 2.7.4 Spherical Error Probability (SEP) and Circular Error Probability (cep) 41 2.8 Observability Analysis of Geolocation 44 References 45 3 Single-Satellite Geolocation System Based on Direction Finding 47 3.1 Direction Finding Techniques 47 3.1.1 Amplitude Comparison DF Technique 48 3.1.2 Interferometer DF Technique 49 3.1.3 Array-Based DF Technique 55 3.1.4 Other DF Techniques 57 3.2 Single-Satellite LOS Geolocation Method and Analysis 57 3.2.1 Model of LOS Geolocation 57 3.2.2 Solution of LOS Geolocation 59 3.2.3 CRLB of the LOS Geolocation Error 60 3.2.4 Simulation and Analysis of the LOS Geolocation Error 62 3.2.5 Geometric Distribution of the LOS Geolocation Error 63 3.3 Multitimes Statistic LOS Geolocation 64 3.3.1 Single-Satellite Multitimes Triangulation 65 3.3.2 Average for Single-Satellite Multitimes Geolocation 66 3.3.3 Weighted Average for Single-Satellite Multitimes Geolocation 67 3.3.4 Simulation of Single-Satellite LOS Geolocation 67 3.4 Single HEO Satellite LOS Geolocation 73 3.4.1 Analysis of Single GEO Satellite LOS Geolocation 73 3.4.2 Geosynchronous Satellite Multitimes LOS Geolocation 74 References 77 4 Multiple Satellites Geolocation Based on TDOA Measurement 79 4.1 Three-Satellite Geolocation Based on a Regular Sphere 80 4.1.1 Three-Satellite Geolocation Solution Method 80 4.1.2 Multisatellite TDOA Geolocation Method 82 4.1.3 CRLB of a Multisatellite TDOA Geolocation Error 85 4.1.4 Osculation Error of the Spherical Earth Model 86 4.2 Three-Satellite Geolocation Based on the WGS-84 Earth Surface Model 88 4.2.1 Analytical Method 89 4.2.2 Spherical Iteration Method 92 4.2.3 Newton Iteration Method 94 4.2.4 Performance Comparison among the Three Solution Methods 96 4.2.5 Altitude Input Location Algorithm 100 4.3 Ambiguity and No-Solution Problems of Geolocation 102 4.3.1 Ambiguity Problem of Geolocation 102 4.3.2 No-Solution Problem of Geolocation 106 4.4 Error Analysis of Three-Satellite Geolocation 109 4.4.1 Analysis of the Random Geolocation Error 109 4.4.2 Analysis of Bias Caused by Altitude Assumption 112 4.4.3 Influence of Change of the Constellation Geometric Configuration on GDOP 114 4.5 Calibration Method of the Three-Satellite TDOA Geolocation System 117 4.5.1 Four-Station Calibration Method and Analysis 117 4.5.2 Three-Station Calibration Method 125 References 130 5 Dual-Satellite Geolocation Based on TDOA and FDOA 133 5.1 Introduction of TDOA–FDOA Geolocation by a Dual-Satellite 133 5.1.1 Explanation of Dual-Satellite Geolocation Theory 133 5.1.2 Structure of Dual-Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation System 134 5.2 Dual LEO Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation Method 136 5.2.1 Geolocation Model 136 5.2.2 Solution Method of Algebraic Analysis 138 5.2.3 Approximate Analytical Method for Same-Orbit Satellites 141 5.2.4 Method for Eliminating an Ambiguous Geolocation Point 143 5.3 Error Analysis for TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 144 5.3.1 Analytic Method for the Geolocation Error 144 5.3.2 GDOP of the Dual LEO Satellite Geolocation Error 146 5.3.3 Analysis of Various Factors Influencing GDOP 151 5.4 Dual HEO Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 152 5.4.1 Dual Geosynchronous Orbit Satellites TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 152 5.4.2 Calibration Method Based on Reference Sources 155 5.4.3 Calibration Method Using Multiple Reference Sources 159 5.4.4 Flow of Calibration and Geolocation 164 5.5 Method of Measuring TDOA and FDOA 165 5.5.1 The Cross-Ambiguity Function 165 5.5.2 Theoretical Analysis on the TDOA–FDOA Measurement Performance 166 5.5.3 Segment Correlation Accumulation Method for CAF Computation 168 5.5.4 Resolution of Multiple Signals of the Same Time and Same Frequency 172 References 174 6 Single-Satellite Geolocation System Based on the Kinematic Principle 177 6.1 Single-Satellite Geolocation Model 177 6.2 Single-Satellite Single-Antenna Frequency-Only Based Geolocation 179 6.2.1 Frequency-Only Based Geolocation Method 179 6.2.2 Analysis of the Geolocation Error 180 6.2.3 Analysis of the Frequency-Only Based Geolocation Error 181 6.3 Single-Satellite Geolocation by the Frequency Changing Rate Only 183 6.3.1 Model of Geolocation by the Frequency Changing Rate Only 183 6.3.2 CRLB of the Geolocation Error 185 6.3.3 Geolocation Simulation 186 6.4 Single-Satellite Single-Antenna TOA-Only Geolocation 186 6.4.1 Model and Method of TOA-Only Geolocation 186 6.4.2 Analysis of the Geolocation Error 189 6.4.3 Geolocation Simulation 192 6.5 Single-Satellite Interferometer Phase Rate of Changing-Only Geolocation 192 6.5.1 Geolocation Model 192 6.5.2 Geolocation Algorithm 195 6.5.3 CRLB of the Geolocation Error 196 6.5.4 Calculation Analysis of the Geolocation Error 197 References 201 7 Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 203 7.1 An Overview of Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 203 7.1.1 Near-Space Platform Overview 203 7.1.2 Geolocation by the Near-Space Platform 204 7.2 Multiplatform Triangulation 204 7.2.1 Theory of 2D Triangulation 204 7.2.2 Error Analysis for Dual-Station Triangulation 205 7.2.3 Optimal Geometric Configuration of Observers 207 7.3 Multiplatform TDOA Geolocation 211 7.3.1 Theory of Multiplatform TDOA Geolocation 211 7.3.2 2D TDOA Geolocation Algorithm 212 7.3.3 TDOA Geolocation Using the Altitude Assumption 215 7.3.4 3D TDOA Geolocation Algorithm 215 7.4 Localization Theory by a Single Platform 217 7.4.1 Measurement Model of Localization 218 7.4.2 A 2D Approximate Localization Method 219 7.4.3 MGEKF (Modified Gain Extended Kalman Filter) Localization Method 221 7.4.4 Simulation 223 References 225 8 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination by Bearings Only 227 8.1 Introduction 227 8.2 Model and Method of Bearings-Only Passive Tracking 227 8.2.1 Mathematic Model in the Case of the Two-Body Problem 228 8.2.2 Tracking Method in the Case of the Two-Body Model 229 8.2.3 Mathematical Model Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 232 8.2.4 Tracking Method Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 233 8.3 System Observability Analysis 235 8.3.1 Description Method for System Observability 235 8.3.2 Influence of Factors on the State Equation 236 8.3.3 Influence of Factors on the Measurement Equation 237 8.4 Tracking Simulation and Analysis 239 8.4.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 241 8.4.2 Simulation Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 251 8.5 Summary 258 References 259 9 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Tracking Based on Angle and Frequency Information 261 9.1 Introduction of Passive Tracking 261 9.2 Tracking Model and Method 262 9.2.1 Mathematic Model in the Case of the Two-Body Model 262 9.2.2 Tracking Method in the Case of the Two-Body Model 263 9.2.3 Mathematical Models Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 266 9.2.4 Tracking Method Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 267 9.3 System Observability Analysis 268 9.3.1 Influence of Factors of the State Equation 269 9.3.2 Influence of Factors of the Measurement Equation 269 9.4 Simulation and Its Analysis 277 9.4.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 278 9.4.2 Simulation Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 296 9.5 Summary 308 References 309 10 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 311 10.1 The Theory and Mathematical Model of Passive Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 313 10.1.1 The Theory of Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 313 10.1.2 The System Model in the Case of the Two-Body Model 313 10.1.3 The System Model for J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 315 10.2 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination Based on PSO and Frequency 317 10.2.1 Introduction of Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) 317 10.2.2 Orbit Determination Method Based on the PSO Algorithm 319 10.3 System Observability Analysis 320 10.3.1 Simulation Scenario 1 322 10.3.2 Simulation Scenario 2 323 10.3.3 Simulation Scenario 3 325 10.4 CRLB of the Orbit Parameter Estimation Error 329 10.5 Orbit Determination and Tracking Simulation and Its Analysis 333 10.5.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 334 10.5.2 Simulation in the Case of Considering the Perturbation 347 References 348 11 A Prospect of Space Electronic Reconnaissance Technology 349 Appendix Transformation of Orbit Elements, State and Coordinates of Satellites in Two-Body Motion 351 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisA functional discussion of the crop selection process for biomass energy The Selection Process of Biomass Materials for the Production of Bio-fuels and Co-firing provides a detailed examination and analysis for a number of energy crops and their use as a source for generating electricity and for the production of bio-fuels. Renowned renewable energy expert and consultant Dr. Najib Altawell begins with the fundamentals of bio-fuels and co-firing and moves on to the main feature, which is the methodology that assists energy scientists and engineers to arrive at the most suitable biomass materials tailored to each company's business and economic environments and objectives. This methodology provides a framework whereby power-generating companies can insert their own values for each factor, whether business factor (BF) or scientific & technical factors (S&T) or both simultaneously. The methodology provides a list of factors related to the biomass energy businTrade Review“Because of its focus on practical data and applications, the book is also accessible for general readers who may or may not have a technical or scientific background.” (Landtechnik, 1 September 2014)Table of ContentsPreface xvAcknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why This Book? 1 1.2 The Book Structure 2 1.2.1 Introduction 2 1.2.2 Structure 3 1.3 Energy Utilization 5 1.4 The Need for Effective Biomass Utilization 7 1.5 Renewable Energy Impact on Biomass Economy 7 1.6 Summary 9 References 10 2 Background 13 2.1 Renewable Energy: A Brief Outlook 13 2.1.1 Introduction 13 2.1.2 Old Graphs 15 2.2 Wind 16 2.3 Water 17 2.4 Geothermal 17 2.5 Solar 19 2.5.1 Solar Cells 20 2.5.2 Solar Water Heating 20 2.5.3 Solar Furnaces 20 2.6 Biomass 21 2.7 Biomass as a Source of Energy 24 2.7.1 Energy Crops 27 2.7.2 Examples of Energy Crops 29 2.7.3 Biomass Utilization 30 2.7.4 Biomass and Coal Components 31 2.7.5 Types of Energy Crop Needed 32 2.7.6 Biomass Energy Infl uencing Factors 33 2.7.7 CharacteristicsCo-fi ring Properties and Testing Method 35 2.8 Biomass Applications 36 2.8.1 Bio-fuels 36 2.8.2 Electricity Generation 37 2.8.3 Heat, Steam, and CHP 37 2.8.4 Combustible Gas 38 2.8.5 Additional Bio-energy Technologies 41 2.9 Co-fi ring 42 2.9.1 Barriers for Biomass Co-firing 43 2.9.2 Additional Challenges for Co-firing 44 2.9.3 Further Advancement in Co-firing Engineering 44 2.9.4 Promoting Co-firing 45 2.10 System Engineering 46 2.11 Biomass Conversion Systems 48 2.12 Energy Crops Scheme (U.K.) 49 2.13 Renewable Obligation Certificate (ROC) (U.K.) 52 2.14 Climate Change Levy Exemption Certificate (LEC) (U.K.) 52 2.15 Conclusion 53 References 56 3 Co-firing Issues 61 3.1 Technical and Engineering Issues 61 3.1.1 Introduction 61 3.1.2 Hardware and Biomass Materials 62 3.2 Technical and Hardware Issues 62 3.3 Milling 65 3.4 Fuel Mixing 66 3.5 The Combustion System 71 3.5.1 Boilers 71 3.6 By-products 75 3.6.1 Ash Formation and Deposition 75 3.7 Degradation 76 3.8 Conclusion 77 References 80 4 Samples 83 4.1 Selected Samples 83 4.1.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Samples General Descriptions 84 4.2.1 The Reference Samples 84 4.3 Main Samples 91 4.3.1 Introduction 91 4.3.2 Crops Basic Composition 92 4.3.3 Crops and Oil Sources 93 4.3.4 Oil Quality and Standard 94 4.3.5 Crops Photosynthesis 94 4.3.6 Energy Crops Environmental Effect 95 4.3.7 Corn (Zea mays L.) 96 4.3.8 Wheat (Triticum aestivum L.) 103 4.3.9 Miscanthus (Miscanthus sinensis) 108 4.3.10 Rice (Oryza sativa) 115 4.3.11 Barley (Hordeum vulgare subsp.) 121 4.3.12 Sunfl ower (Helianthus annuus) 126 4.3.13 Niger Seed (Guizotia abyssinica) 134 4.3.14 Rapeseed (Brassica napus) 141 4.4 Conclusion 147 4.4.1 Samples Selection 148 4.4.2 The Next Step 150 References 151 5 Methodology: Part 1 161 5.1 Methodology Approach 161 5.1.1 Introduction 161 5.2 The Pyramid 162 5.3 The Decision Tree 164 5.3.1 Steps for the Biomass Fuel 164 5.3.2 Three Numbers 165 5.4 Methodology Terms and Defi nition for BF and S&T 166 5.4.1 BF 166 5.4.2 S&T 166 5.5 BF and S&T Data 166 5.5.1 Why Are Data for the BF and S&T Needed? 166 5.5.2 How Are Data for the BF Obtained? 168 5.5.3 How Are Data for the S&T Obtained? 170 5.6 Scoring System 170 5.6.1 The Method 170 5.6.2 Calculating the Score When the Reference Sample Is Set in a Positive Mode 172 5.6.3 Calculating the Score When the Reference Sample Is Set in a Negative Mode 172 5.6.4 Boundaries for S&T 174 5.6.5 Boundaries for BF 174 5.6.6 Reference Sample Boundaries 174 5.6.7 Biomass Boundaries 175 5.6.8 Scoring Plan for BF 176 5.7 Methodology Survey 177 5.8 The Survey Method 178 5.8.1 Aim 178 5.8.2 Objective 178 5.8.3 What Is the Survey Looking For? 178 5.8.4 Survey Methodology 178 5.8.5 Mode 179 5.8.6 Mode Effect 179 5.8.7 Questionnaire Design 179 5.8.8 Sample Design 179 5.8.9 Sample Size 180 5.8.10 Pretesting and Piloting 180 5.8.11 Reducing and Dealing with Nonresponse 180 5.9 Conclusion 181 References 183 6 Methodology: Part 2 185 6.1 Introduction 185 6.1.1 Biomass Samples and Methodology 186 6.2 S&T Values Analysis 186 6.3 S&T Factor Evaluations 187 6.3.1 Energy Factor (EF) 187 6.3.2 Combustion Index Factor (CIF) 190 6.3.3 Volatile Matter Factor (VMF) 193 6.3.4 Moisture Factor (MF) 195 6.3.5 Ash Factor (AF) 196 6.3.6 Density Factor (DF) 199 6.3.7 Nitrogen Emission (Nx) Factor (NEF) 201 6.4 S&T Allocation Results 203 6.4.1 Introduction 203 6.4.2 The Priority List 204 6.5 Conclusion 206 References 208 7 Methodology: Part 3 211 7.1 BF Percentage Value Selection 211 7.1.1 Introduction 211 7.1.2 BF Subjective and Objective Factors 212 7.1.3 Percentage Allocation for BF 212 7.1.4 BF Values and Headlines 213 7.1.5 Biomass Energy Commercialization and BF 213 7.2 BF Values Analysis 215 7.3 BF Evaluations 216 7.3.1 System Factor (SF) 217 7.3.2 Approach Factor (AF) 218 7.3.3 Baseline Methodology Factor (BMF) 219 7.3.4 Business Viability Factor (BVF) 219 7.3.5 Applicability Factor (APF) 220 7.3.6 Land and Water Issues Factor (LWIF) 223 7.3.7 Supply Factor (SUF) 224 7.3.8 Quality Factor (QF) 225 7.3.9 Emission Factor 226 7.4 BF Data 228 7.4.1 Introduction 228 7.4.2 The Priority List 230 7.5 Conclusion 235 References 237 8 Results: Part 1 239 8.1 Statistical Data and Errors 239 8.1.1 Introduction 239 8.2 Methodology Level Value (Boundary Level Scoring Value) 241 8.3 Calculating Standard Deviation and Relative Error 242 8.3.1 S&T Factors 243 8.3.2 Business Factors (BF) 246 8.3.3 Methodology Standard Deviation for S&T 249 8.3.4 Methodology Standard Deviation for BF 250 8.3.5 Methodology Standard Deviation 251 8.4 Analysis 251 8.5 Conclusion 255 References 257 9 Results: Part 2 259 9.1 Data and Methodology Application 259 9.1.1 Introduction 259 9.2 Tests 260 9.2.1 Experimental Tests 260 9.3 S&T Samples Data and Reports (Results) 265 9.3.1 Fossil Fuel 265 9.3.2 Biomass Materials 266 9.4 BF Samples Reports Examples (Results) 277 9.4.1 Coal BF Data (Altawell, GSTF, 2012) 277 9.4.2 Rapeseed BF Report 278 9.4.3 Black Sunfl ower Seed BF Report 278 9.4.4 Niger Seed BF Report 279 9.4.5 Apple Pruning BF Report 280 9.4.6 Striped Sunflower Seed BF Report 281 9.5 The Final Biomass Samples 282 9.5.1 S&T Results 282 9.5.2 BF Results 284 9.6 Samples Final Fitness 285 9.7 Discussion and Analysis 289 9.8 Conclusion 294 References 296 10 Economic Factors 297 10.1 Biomass Fuel Economic Factors and SFS 297 10.1.1 Introduction 297 10.2 Economic Factors 298 10.3 Biomass Business 300 10.3.1 Step 1 300 10.3.2 Step 2 301 10.3.3 Step 3 302 10.3.4 Step 4 304 10.4 Biomass Fuel Supply Chain 305 10.5 The Demand for a New Biomass Fuel 306 10.6 The SFS Economic Value Scenario 307 10.7 Discussion 308 10.8 Conclusion 310 References 312 11 Conclusion 315 11.1 General Conclusion 315 11.2 Methodology (REA1) and Applications 316 11.3 Why Biomass? 316 11.4 Co-firing and Power Generating 318 11.5 The New Biomass Fuel (SFS) 318 11.6 The Future of Co-firing and Biomass Energy 319 11.7 Final Results and Final Conclusion 320 11.8 Positive Outlook 320 11.9 What Next? 321 References 321 Index 323

Read more less

Book SynopsisRecent advances in science and technology have made modern computing and engineering systems more powerful and sophisticated than ever. The increasing complexity and scale imply that system reliability problems not only continue to be a challenge but also require more efficient models and solutions.Table of ContentsPreface xiiiNomenclature xix1 Introduction 11.1 Historical Developments 11.2 Reliability and Safety Applications 42 Basic Reliability Theory and Models 72.1 Probabiltiy Concepts 72.2 Reliability Measures 142.3 Fault Tree Analysis 173 Fundamentals of Binary Decision Diagrams 333.1 Preliminaries 343.2 Basic Concepts 343.3 BDD Construction 353.4 BDD Evaluation 423.5 BDD-Based Software Package 444 Application of BDD to Binary-State Systems 454.1 Network Reliability Analysis 454.2 Event Tree Analysis 474.3 Failure Frequency Analysis 504.4 Importance Measures and Analysis 544.5 Modularization Methods 604.6 Non-Coherent Systems 604.7 Disjoint Failures 654.8 Dependent Failures 685 Phased-Mission Systems 735.1 System Description 745.2 Rules of Phase Algebra 755.3 BDD-Based Method for PMS Analysis 765.4 Mission Performance Analysis 816 Multi-State Systems 856.1 Assumptions 866.2 An Illustrative Example 866.3 MSS Representation 876.4 Multi-State BDD (MBDD) 906.5 Logarithmically-Encoded BDD (LBDD) 946.6 Multi-State Multi-Valued Decision Diagrams (MMDD) 986.7 Performance Evaluation and Benchmarks 1026.8 Summary 1177 Fault Tolerant Systems and Coverage Models 1197.1 Basic Types 1207.2 Imperfect Coverage Model 1227.3 Applications to Binary-State Systems 1237.4 Applications to Multi-State Systems 1297.5 Applications to Phased-Mission Systems 1337.6 Summary 1398 Shared Decision Diagrams 1438.1 Multi-Rooted Decision Diagrams 1448.2 Multi-Terminal Decision Diagrams 1488.3 Performance Study on Multi-State Systems 1518.4 Application to Phased-Mission Systems 1638.5 Application to Multi-State k-out-of-n Systems 1688.6 Importance Measures 1768.7 Failure Frequency Based Measures 1808.8 Summary 183Conclusions 185References 187Index 205

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the essential techniques for designing and building dependable distributed systems. Instead of covering a broad range of research works for each dependability strategy, it focuses on only a selected few, explaining each in depth, usually with a comprehensive set of examples.Table of ContentsList of Figures xiiiList of Tables xxiAcknowledgements xxiiiPreface xxvReferences xxviii1 Introduction to Dependable Distributed Computing 11.1 Basic Concepts and Terminologies 21.2 Means to Achieve Dependability 9References 132 Logging and Checkpointing 152.1 System Model 162.2 Checkpoint-Based Protocols 212.3 Log Based Protocols 34References 543 Recovery-Oriented Computing 573.1 System Model 593.2 Fault Detection and Localization 623.3 Microreboot 833.4 Overcoming Operator Errors 87References 934 Data and Service Replication 974.1 Service Replication 994.2 Data Replication 1054.3 Optimistic Replication 1114.4 CAP Theorem 131References 1385 Group Communication Systems 1415.1 System Model 1435.2 Sequencer Based Group Communication System 1465.3 Sender Based Group Communication System 1605.4 Vector Clock Based Group Communication System 186References 1916 Consensus and the Paxos Algorithms 1936.1 The Consensus Problem 6.2 The Paxos Algorithm 1966.3 Multi-Paxos 2066.4 Dynamic Paxos 2106.5 Fast Paxos 2216.6 Implementations of the Paxos Family Algorithms 229References 2367 Byzantine Fault Tolerance 2397.1 The Byzantine Generals Problem 2407.2 Practical Byzantine Fault Tolerance 2557.3 Fast Byzantine Agreement 2717.4 Speculative Byzantine Fault Tolerance 271References 284

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical, step-by-step guide to designing world-class, high availability systems using both classical and DFSS reliability techniques Whether designing telecom, aerospace, automotive, medical, financial, or public safety systems, every engineer aims for the utmost reliability and availability in the systems he, or she, designs. But between the dream of world-class performance and reality falls the shadow of complexities that can bedevil even the most rigorous design process. While there are an array of robust predictive engineering tools, there has been no single-source guide to understanding and using them . . . until now. Offering a case-based approach to designing, predicting, and deploying world-class high-availability systems from the ground up, this book brings together the best classical and DFSS reliability techniques. Although it focuses on technical aspects, this guide considers the business and market constraints that require that systems be designTable of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xvii 1. Introduction 1 2. Initial Considerations for Reliability Design 3 2.1 The Challenge 3 2.2 Initial Data Collection 3 2.3 Where Do We Get MTBF Information? 5 2.4 MTTR and Identifying Failures 6 2.5 Summary 7 3. A Game of Dice: An Introduction to Probability 8 3.1 Introduction 8 3.2 A Game of Dice 10 3.3 Mutually Exclusive and Independent Events 10 3.4 Dice Paradox Problem and Conditional Probability 15 3.5 Flip a Coin 21 3.6 Dice Paradox Revisited 23 3.7 Probabilities for Multiple Dice Throws 24 3.8 Conditional Probability Revisited 27 3.9 Summary 29 4. Discrete Random Variables 30 4.1 Introduction 30 4.2 Random Variables 31 4.3 Discrete Probability Distributions 33 4.4 Bernoulli Distribution 34 4.5 Geometric Distribution 35 4.6 Binomial Coeffi cients 38 4.7 Binomial Distribution 40 4.8 Poisson Distribution 43 4.9 Negative Binomial Random Variable 48 4.10 Summary 50 5. Continuous Random Variables 51 5.1 Introduction 51 5.2 Uniform Random Variables 52 5.3 Exponential Random Variables 53 5.4 Weibull Random Variables 54 5.5 Gamma Random Variables 55 5.6 Chi-Square Random Variables 59 5.7 Normal Random Variables 59 5.8 Relationship between Random Variables 60 5.9 Summary 61 6. Random Processes 62 6.1 Introduction 62 6.2 Markov Process 63 6.3 Poisson Process 63 6.4 Deriving the Poisson Distribution 64 6.5 Poisson Interarrival Times 69 6.6 Summary 71 7. Modeling and Reliability Basics 72 7.1 Introduction 72 7.2 Modeling 75 7.3 Failure Probability and Failure Density 77 7.4 Unreliability, F(t) 78 7.5 Reliability, R(t) 79 7.6 MTTF 79 7.7 MTBF 79 7.8 Repairable System 80 7.9 Nonrepairable System 80 7.10 MTTR 80 7.11 Failure Rate 81 7.12 Maintainability 81 7.13 Operability 81 7.14 Availability 82 7.15 Unavailability 84 7.16 Five 9s Availability 85 7.17 Downtime 85 7.18 Constant Failure Rate Model 85 7.19 Conditional Failure Rate 88 7.20 Bayes’s Theorem 94 7.21 Reliability Block Diagrams 98 7.22 Summary 107 8. Discrete-Time Markov Analysis 110 8.1 Introduction 110 8.2 Markov Process Defined 112 8.3 Dynamic Modeling 116 8.4 Discrete Time Markov Chains 116 8.5 Absorbing Markov Chains 123 8.6 Nonrepairable Reliability Models 129 8.7 Summary 140 9. Continuous-Time Markov Systems 141 9.1 Introduction 141 9.2 Continuous-Time Markov Processes 141 9.3 Two-State Derivation 143 9.4 Steps to Create a Markov Reliability Model 147 9.5 Asymptotic Behavior (Steady-State Behavior) 148 9.6 Limitations of Markov Modeling 154 9.7 Markov Reward Models 154 9.8 Summary 155 10. Markov Analysis: Nonrepairable Systems 156 10.1 Introduction 156 10.2 One Component, No Repair 156 10.3 Nonrepairable Systems: Parallel System with No Repair 165 10.4 Series System with No Repair: Two Identical Components 172 10.5 Parallel System with Partial Repair: Identical Components 176 10.6 Parallel System with No Repair: Nonidentical Components 183 10.7 Summary 192 11. Markov Analysis: Repairable Systems 193 11.1 Repairable Systems 193 11.2 One Component with Repair 194 11.3 Parallel System with Repair: Identical Component Failure and Repair Rates 204 11.4 Parallel System with Repair: Different Failure and Repair Rates 217 11.5 Summary 239 12. Analyzing Confidence Levels 240 12.1 Introduction 240 12.2 pdf of a Squared Normal Random Variable 240 12.3 pdf of the Sum of Two Random Variables 243 12.4 pdf of the Sum of Two Gamma Random Variables 245 12.5 pdf of the Sum of n Gamma Random Variables 246 12.6 Goodness-of-Fit Test Using Chi-Square 249 12.7 Confidence Levels 257 12.8 Summary 264 13. Estimating Reliability Parameters 266 13.1 Introduction 266 13.2 Bayes’ Estimation 268 13.3 Example of Estimating Hardware MTBF 273 13.4 Estimating Software MTBF 273 13.5 Revising Initial MTBF Estimates and Tradeoffs 274 13.6 Summary 277 14. Six Sigma Tools for Predictive Engineering 278 14.1 Introduction 278 14.2 Gathering Voice of Customer (VOC) 279 14.3 Processing Voice of Customer 281 14.4 Kano Analysis 282 14.5 Analysis of Technical Risks 284 14.6 Quality Function Deployment (QFD) or House of Quality 284 14.7 Program Level Transparency of Critical Parameters 287 14.8 Mapping DFSS Techniques to Critical Parameters 287 14.9 Critical Parameter Management (CPM) 287 14.10 First Principles Modeling 289 14.11 Design of Experiments (DOE) 289 14.12 Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (DFMEA) 289 14.13 Fault Tree Analysis 290 14.14 Pugh Matrix 290 14.15 Monte Carlo Simulation 291 14.16 Commercial DFSS Tools 291 14.17 Mathematical Prediction of System Capability instead of “Gut Feel” 293 14.18 Visualizing System Behavior Early in the Life Cycle 297 14.19 Critical Parameter Scorecard 297 14.20 Applying DFSS in Third-Party Intensive Programs 298 14.21 Summary 300 15. Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis 302 15.1 Introduction 302 15.2 What Is Design Failure Modes and Effects Analysis (DFMEA)? 302 15.3 Definitions 303 15.4 Business Case for DFMEA 303 15.5 Why Conduct DFMEA? 305 15.6 When to Perform DFMEA 305 15.7 Applicability of DFMEA 306 15.8 DFMEA Template 306 15.9 DFMEA Life Cycle 312 15.10 The DFMEA Team 324 15.11 DFMEA Advantages and Disadvantages 327 15.12 Limitations of DFMEA 328 15.13 DFMEAs, FTAs, and Reliability Analysis 328 15.14 Summary 330 16. Fault Tree Analysis 331 16.1 What Is Fault Tree Analysis? 331 16.2 Events 332 16.3 Logic Gates 333 16.4 Creating a Fault Tree 335 16.5 Fault Tree Limitations 339 16.6 Summary 339 17. Monte Carlo Simulation Models 340 17.1 Introduction 340 17.2 System Behavior over Mission Time 344 17.3 Reliability Parameter Analysis 344 17.4 A Worked Example 348 17.5 Component and System Failure Times Using Monte Carlo Simulations 359 17.6 Limitations of Using Nontime-Based Monte Carlo Simulations 361 17.7 Summary 365 18. Updating Reliability Estimates: Case Study 367 18.1 Introduction 367 18.2 Overview of the Base Station Controller—Data Only (BSC-DO) System 367 18.3 Downtime Calculation 368 18.4 Calculating Availability from Field Data Only 371 18.5 Assumptions Behind Using the Chi-Square Methodology 372 18.6 Fault Tree Updates from Field Data 372 18.7 Summary 376 19. Fault Management Architectures 377 19.1 Introduction 377 19.2 Faults, Errors, and Failures 378 19.3 Fault Management Design 381 19.4 Repair versus Recovery 382 19.5 Design Considerations for Reliability Modeling 383 19.6 Architecture Techniques to Improve Availability 383 19.7 Redundancy Schemes 384 19.8 Summary 395 20 Application of DFMEA to Real-Life Example 397 20.1 Introduction 397 20.2 Cage Failover Architecture Description 397 20.3 Cage Failover DFMEA Example 399 20.4 DFMEA Scorecard 401 20.5 Lessons Learned 402 20.6 Summary 403 21. Application of FTA to Real-Life Example 404 21.1 Introduction 404 21.2 Calculating Availability Using Fault Tree Analysis 404 21.3 Building the Basic Events 405 21.4 Building the Fault Tree 406 21.5 Steps for Creating and Estimating the Availability Using FTA 408 21.6 Summary 416 22. Complex High Availability System Analysis 420 22.1 Introduction 420 22.2 Markov Analysis of the Hardware Components 420 22.3 Building a Fault Tree from the Hardware Markov Model 427 22.4 Markov Analysis of the Software Components 427 22.5 Markov Analysis of the Combined Hardware and Software Components 433 22.6 Techniques for Simplifying Markov Analysis 437 22.7 Summary 446 References 447 Index 450

Read more less

Book SynopsisGender, Politics, News: A Game of Three Sides explores the role of gender in the broader processes of political communication The only contemporary book focusing on the relationships between gender, politics, and news media which takes a global perspective An analysis of political journalism as a practice and the development of the field in terms of gendered workplace cultures Offers a solid framework for understanding women's political representation, including real world case studies of women's campaigns for the top political job across a range of different geographies and contexts Coverage of hot-button issues, such as political scandal and the role of new and social media in politics and elections, makes this a highly relevant and current work with resonances for a wide audience Table of ContentsAcknowledgments ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Women and Politics: Then and Now 11 3 Women in the Boyzone 31 4 Women, Politics, and Campaign Coverage: More (or Less) Bad News 55 5 Girls on Top? Winning and Losing the Political Crown 81 6 Behind Every Great Man (or Occasionally Woman): The Political Spouse 117 7 Scandalicious: The Politics of Scandal and the Scandal of Politics 147 8 Conclusions 179 Select Bibliography 191 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisGender, Politics, News: A Game of Three Sides explores the role of gender in the broader processes of political communication The only contemporary book focusing on the relationships between gender, politics, and news media which takes a global perspective An analysis of political journalism as a practice and the development of the field in terms of gendered workplace cultures Offers a solid framework for understanding women's political representation, including real world case studies of women's campaigns for the top political job across a range of different geographies and contexts Coverage of hot-button issues, such as political scandal and the role of new and social media in politics and elections, makes this a highly relevant and current work with resonances for a wide audience Table of ContentsAcknowledgments ix 1 Introduction 1 2 Women and Politics: Then and Now 11 3 Women in the Boyzone 31 4 Women, Politics, and Campaign Coverage: More (or Less) Bad News 55 5 Girls on Top? Winning and Losing the Political Crown 81 6 Behind Every Great Man (or Occasionally Woman): The Political Spouse 117 7 Scandalicious: The Politics of Scandal and the Scandal of Politics 147 8 Conclusions 179 Select Bibliography 191 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisA concise, engineering-oriented resource that provides practical support to IT professionals and those responsible for the quality of the software or systems they develop Software quality stems from two distinctive, but associated, topics in software engineering: software functional quality and software structural quality. This book studies the tenets of both of these notions, which focus on the efficiency and value of a design, respectively. It addresses engineering quality on both the application and system levels with attention to information systems (IS) and embedded systems (ES) as well as recent developments. Software Quality Engineering introduces the basic concepts of quality engineering like the nature of the engineering process, quality models and measurements, and evaluation quality, and provides a step-by-step overview of the application of software quality engineering in commonly recognized phases of the software development process. It also discussTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Why Software Quality Engineering? 1 2 Software Quality Engineering: Making It Happen 35 3 System and Software Quality Engineering: Some Application Contexts 139 4 Trustworthiness of IT Systems and Services 151 Appendix Cost of Missing Quality: Case Studies 175 Index 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisDistributed systems employed in critical infrastructures must fulfill dependability, timeliness, and performance specifications. Since these systems most often operate in an unpredictable environment, their design and maintenance require quantitative evaluation of deterministic and probabilistic timed models. This need gave birth to an abundant literature devoted to formal modeling languages combined with analytical and simulative solution techniques The aim of the book is to provide an overview of techniques and methodologies dealing with such specific issues in the context of distributed systems and covering aspects such as performance evaluation, reliability/availability, energy efficiency, scalability, and sustainability. Specifically, techniques for checking and verifying if and how a distributed system satisfies the requirements, as well as how to properly evaluate non-functional aspects, or how to optimize the overall behavior of the system, are all discussed in the boTable of ContentsPreface xiiiPART I VERIFICATION1. Modeling and Verification of Distributed Systems Using Markov Decision Processes 31.1 Introduction 41.2 Markov Decision Processes 51.3 Markov Decision Well-Formed Net formalism 81.4 Case study: Peer-to-Peer Botnets 101.5 Conclusion 18Appendices: Well-formed Net Formalism 21A.1.1 Syntax of Basic Predicates 22A.1.2 Markings and Enabling 23References 252 Quantitative Analysis of Distributed Systems in Stoklaim: A Tutorial 272.1 Introduction 282.2 StoKlaim: Stochastic Klaim 292.3 StoKlaim Operational Semantics 342.4 MoSL: Mobile Stochastic Logic 432.5 jSAM: Java Stochastic Model-Checker 472.6 Leader Election in StoKlaim 492.7 Concluding Remarks 52References 533 Stochastic Path Properties of Distributed Systems: the CSLTA Approach 573.1 Introduction 583.2 The Reference Formalisms for System Definition 593.3 The Formalism for Path Property Definition: CSLTA 613.4 CSLTA at work: a Fault-Tolerant Node 673.5 Literature Comparison 713.6 Summary and Final Remarks 73References 75PART II EVALUATION4 Failure Propagation in Load-Sharing Complex Systems 814.1 Introduction 824.2 Building Blocks 844.3 Sand Box for Distributed Failures 894.4 Summary 102References 1035 Approximating Distributions and Transient Probabilities by Matrix Exponential Distributions and Functions 1075.1 Introduction 1085.2 Phase Type and Matrix Exponential Distributions 1095.3 Bernstein Polynomials and Expolynomials 1145.4 Application of BEs to Distribution Fitting 1165.5 Application of BEs to Transient Probabilities 1215.6 Conclusions 124References 1256 Worst-Case Analysis of Tandem Queueing Systems Using Network Calculus 1296.1 Introduction 1306.2 Basic Network Calculus Modeling: Per-flow Scheduling 1326.3 Advanced Network Calculus Modeling: Aggregate Multiplexing 1486.4 Tandem Systems Traversed by Several Flows 1526.5 Mathematical Programming Approach 1546.6 Related Work 1656.7 Numerical Results 1666.8 Conclusions 168References 1717 Cloud Evaluation: Benchmarking and Monitoring 1757.1 Introduction 1767.2 Benchmarking 1767.3 Benchmarking with mOSAIC 1847.4 Monitoring 1857.5 Cloud Monitoring in mOSAIC?s Cloud Agency 1917.6 Conclusions 193References 1958 Multiformalism and Multisolution Strategies for Systems Performance 2018.1 Introduction 2028.2 Multiformalism and Multisolution 2038.3 Choosing the Right Strategy 2058.4 Learning by the Experience 2068.5 Conclusions and Perspectives 218References 219PART III OPTIMIZATION AND SUSTAINABILITY9 Quantitative Assessment of Distributed Networks Through Hybrid Stochastic Modeling 2259.1 Introduction 2269.2 Modeling of Complex Systems 2289.3 Performance Evaluation of KNXnet/IP Networks Flow Control Mechanism 2349.4 LCII: On-line Risk Estimation of A Power-Telco Network 2489.5 Conclusion 259References 26110 Design of IT Infrastructures of Data Centers: An Approach Based on Business and Technical Metrics 26510.1 Introduction 26610.2 Fundamental Concepts 26710.3 Business-Oriented Models 27010.4 Data Center Infrastructure Models 27410.5 Methodology 27710.6 Case Study - Data Center Design 28310.7 Conclusion 292References 29711 Software Rejuvenation and its Application in Distributed Systems 30111.1 Introduction 30211.2 Software rejuvenation scheduling classification 30411.3 Software rejuvenation granularity classification 30711.4 Methods, policies and metrics of software rejuvenation 31411.5 Software rejuvenation in distributed systems 31511.6 Summary 318References 32112 Machine Learning Based Dynamic Reconfiguration of Distributed Data Management Systems 32712.1 Introduction 32812.2 Methodologies 33012.3 Brief overview of Neural Networks 33412.4 System Architecture and Performance Prediction Scheme 33612.5 Experimentation 33912.6 Conclusions 346References 34713 Going Green with the Networked Cloud: Methodologies and Assessment 35113.1 Introduction 35213.2 Modeling of Data Centre Power Consumption 35313.3 Energy Efficiency in the Cloud 35613.4 Performance Analysis Methodologies and Tools 36113.5 Case Study: Performance Evaluation of Energy Aware Resource Allocation in the Cloud 36613.6 Summary 370References 371Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisAdvanced research reference examining the closed and open quantum systems Control of Quantum Systems: Theory and Methods provides an insight into the modern approaches to control of quantum systems evolution, with a focus on both closed and open (dissipative) quantum systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Quantum States 2 1.2 Quantum Systems Control Models 3 1.2.1 Schrödinger Equation 4 1.2.2 Liouville Equation 4 1.2.3 Markovian Master Equations 5 1.2.4 Non-Markovian Master Equations 5 1.3 Structures of Quantum Control Systems 6 1.4 Control Tasks and Objectives 8 1.5 System Characteristics Analyses 9 1.5.1 Controllability 9 1.5.2 Reachability 9 1.5.3 Observability 10 1.5.4 Stability 10 1.5.5 Convergence 10 1.5.6 Robustness 10 1.6 Performance of Control Systems 11 1.6.1 Probability 11 1.6.2 Fidelity 11 1.6.3 Purity 12 1.7 Quantum Systems Control 13 1.7.1 Description of Control Problems 13 1.7.2 Quantum Control Theory and Methods 13 1.8 Overview of the Book 16 References 18 2 State Transfer and Analysis of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1 Analysis of a Two-level Quantum System State 21 2.1.1 Pure State Expression on the Bloch Sphere 21 2.1.2 Mixed States in the Bloch Sphere 24 2.1.3 Control Trajectory on the Bloch Sphere 26 2.2 State Transfer of Quantum Systems on the Bloch Sphere 27 2.2.1 Control of a Single Spin-1/2 Particle 28 2.2.2 Situation with the Minimum Ωt of Control Fields 30 2.2.3 Situation with a Fixed Time T 31 2.2.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 33 References 37 3 Control Methods of Closed Quantum Systems 39 3.1 Improved Optimal Control Strategies Applied in Quantum Systems 39 3.1.1 Optimal Control of Quantum Systems 40 3.1.2 Improved Quantum Optimal Control Method 42 3.1.3 Krotov-Based Method of Optimal Control 43 3.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Performance Analysis 45 3.2 Control Design of High-Dimensional Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems 48 3.2.1 Coherent Population Transfer Approaches 48 3.2.2 Relationships between the Hamiltonian of Spin-1/2 Quantum Systems under Control and the Sequence of Pulses 49 3.2.3 Design of the Control Sequence of Pulses 52 3.2.4 Simulation Experiments of Population Transfer 53 3.3 Comparison of Time Optimal Control for Two-Level Quantum Systems 57 3.3.1 Description of System Model 58 3.3.2 Geometric Control 59 3.3.3 Bang-Bang Control 61 3.3.4 Time Comparisons of Two Control Strategies 64 3.3.5 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analyses 66 References 71 4 Manipulation of Eigenstates – Based on Lyapunov Method 73 4.1 Principle of the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 74 4.2 Quantum Control Strategy Based on State Distance 75 4.2.1 Selection of the Lyapunov Function 76 4.2.2 Design of the Feedback Control Law 77 4.2.3 Analysis and Proof of the Stability 78 4.2.4 Application to a Spin-1/2 Particle System 80 4.3 Optimal Quantum Control Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 81 4.3.1 Description of the System Model 82 4.3.2 Optimal Control Law Design and Property Analysis 84 4.3.3 Simulation Experiments and the Results Comparisons 86 4.4 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate Based on the Lyapunov Method 88 4.4.1 Mathematical Model 89 4.4.2 Realization of the Quantum Hadamard Gate 90 4.4.3 Design of Control Fields 92 4.4.4 Numerical Simulations and Comparison Results Analyses 94 References 96 5 Population Control Based on the Lyapunov Method 99 5.1 Population Control of Equilibrium State 99 5.1.1 Preliminary Notions 99 5.1.2 Control Laws Design 100 5.1.3 Analysis of the Largest Invariant Set 101 5.1.4 Considerations on the Determination of P 104 5.1.5 Illustrative Example 105 5.1.6 Appendix: Proof of Theorem 5.1 107 5.2 Generalized Control of Quantum Systems in the Frame of Vector Treatment 110 5.2.1 Design of Control Law 110 5.2.2 Convergence Analysis 113 5.2.3 Numerical Simulation on a Spin-1/2 System 114 5.3 Population Control of Eigenstates 117 5.3.1 System Model and Control Laws 117 5.3.2 Largest Invariant Set of Control Systems 118 5.3.3 Analysis of the Eigenstate Control 118 5.3.4 Simulation Experiments 119 References 123 6 Quantum General State Control Based on Lyapunov Method 125 6.1 Pure State Manipulation 125 6.1.1 Design of Control Law and Discussion 125 6.1.2 Control System Simulations and Results Analyses 129 6.2 Optimal Control Strategy of the Superposition State 131 6.2.1 Preliminary Knowledge 132 6.2.2 Control Law Design 133 6.2.3 Numerical Simulations 134 6.3 Optimal Control of Mixed-State Quantum Systems 135 6.3.1 Model of the System to be Controlled 136 6.3.2 Control Law Design 137 6.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 142 6.4 Arbitrary Pure State to a Mixed-State Manipulation 145 6.4.1 Transfer from an Arbitrary Pure State to an Eigenstate 146 6.4.2 Transfer from an Eigenstate to a Mixed State by Interaction Control 147 6.4.3 Control Design for a Mixed-State Transfer 149 6.4.4 Numerical Simulation Experiments 151 References 154 7 Convergence Analysis Based on the Lyapunov Stability Theorem 155 7.1 Population Control of Quantum States Based on Invariant Subsets with the Diagonal Lyapunov Function 155 7.1.1 System Model and Control Design 155 7.1.2 Correspondence between any Target Eigenstate and the Value of the Lyapunov Function 156 7.1.3 Invariant Set of Control Systems 157 7.1.4 Numerical Simulations 161 7.1.5 Summary and Discussion 164 7.2 A Convergent Control Strategy of Quantum Systems 165 7.2.1 Problem Description 165 7.2.2 Construction Method of the Observable Operator 166 7.2.3 Proof of Convergence 168 7.2.4 Route Extension Strategy 173 7.2.5 Numerical Simulations 174 7.3 Path Programming Control Strategy of Quantum State Transfer 176 7.3.1 Control Law Design Based on the Lyapunov Method in the Interaction Picture 177 7.3.2 Transition Path Programming Control Strategy 178 7.3.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 182 References 186 8 Control Theory and Methods in Degenerate Cases 187 8.1 Implicit Lyapunov Control of Multi-Control Hamiltonian Systems Based on State Error 187 8.1.1 Control Design 188 8.1.2 Convergence Proof 192 8.1.3 Relation between Two Lyapunov Functions 193 8.1.4 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 193 8.2 Quantum Lyapunov Control Based on the Average Value of an Imaginary Mechanical Quantity 195 8.2.1 Control Law Design and Convergence Proof 195 8.2.2 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 199 8.3 Implicit Lyapunov Control for the Quantum Liouville Equation 200 8.3.1 Description of Problem 201 8.3.2 Derivation of Control Laws 202 8.3.3 Convergence Analysis 205 8.3.4 Numerical Simulations 209 References 211 9 Manipulation Methods of the General State 213 9.1 Quantum System Schmidt Decomposition and its Geometric Analysis 213 9.1.1 Schmidt Decomposition of Quantum States 214 9.1.2 Definition of Entanglement Degree Based on the Schmidt Decomposition 215 9.1.3 Application of the Schmidt Decomposition 216 9.2 Preparation of Entanglement States in a Two-Spin System 220 9.2.1 Construction of the Two-Spin Systems Model in the Interaction Picture 220 9.2.2 Design of the Control Field Based on the Lyapunov Method 223 9.2.3 Proof of Convergence for the Bell States 226 9.2.4 Numerical Simulations 227 9.3 Purification of the Mixed State for Two-Dimensional Systems 230 9.3.1 Purification by Means of a Probe 230 9.3.2 Purification by Interaction Control 232 9.3.3 Numerical Experiments and Results Comparisons 233 9.3.4 Discussion 234 References 235 10 State Control of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1 State Transfer of Open Quantum Systems with a Single Control Field 237 10.1.1 Dynamical Model of Open Quantum Systems 237 10.1.2 Derivation of Optimal Control Law 238 10.1.3 Control System Design 241 10.1.4 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 242 10.2 Purity and Coherence Compensation through the Interaction between Particles 246 10.2.1 Method of Compensation for Purity and Coherence 247 10.2.2 Analysis of System Evolution 250 10.2.3 Numerical Simulations 253 10.2.4 Discussion 255 Appendix 10.A Proof of Equation 10.59 257 References 258 11 State Estimation, Measurement, and Control of Quantum Systems 261 11.1 State Estimation Methods in Quantum Systems 261 11.1.1 Background of State Estimation of Quantum Systems 262 11.1.2 Quantum State Estimation Methods Based on the Measurement of Identical Copies 262 11.1.3 Quantum State Reconstruction Methods Based on System Theory 267 11.2 Entanglement Detection and Measurement of Quantum Systems 268 11.2.1 Entanglement States 269 11.2.2 Entanglement Witnesses 271 11.2.3 Entanglement Measures 273 11.2.4 Non-linear Separability Criteria 277 11.3 Decoherence Control Based on Weak Measurement 278 11.3.1 Construction of a Weak Measurement Operator 279 11.3.2 Applicability of Weak Measurement 280 11.3.3 Effects on States 282 Appendix 11.A Proof of Normed Linear Space (A, ¡¬ • ¡¬) 286 References 287 12 State Preservation of Open Quantum Systems 291 12.1 Coherence Preservation in a Λ-Type Three-Level Atom 291 12.1.1 Models and Objectives 292 12.1.2 Design of Control Field 294 12.1.3 Analysis of Singularities Issues 297 12.1.4 Numerical Simulations 299 12.2 Purity Preservation of Quantum Systems by a Resonant Field 301 12.2.1 Problem Description 302 12.2.2 Purity Property Preservation 303 12.2.3 Discussion 306 12.3 Coherence Preservation in Markovian Open Quantum Systems 307 12.3.1 Problem Formulation 308 12.3.2 Design of Control Variables 311 12.3.3 Numerical Simulations 313 12.3.4 Discussion 315 Appendix 12.A Derivation of HC 316 References 317 13 State Manipulation in Decoherence-Free Subspace 321 13.1 State Transfer and Coherence Maintainance Based on DFS for a Four-Level Energy Open Quantum System 321 13.1.1 Construction of DFS and the Desired Target State 322 13.1.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 325 13.1.3 Numerical Simulations 326 13.2 State Transfer Based on a Decoherence-Free Target State for a Λ-Type N-Level Atomic System 328 13.2.1 Construction of the Decoherence-Free Target State 328 13.2.2 Design of the Lyapunov-Based Control Law for State Transfer 331 13.2.3 Numerical Simulations and Results Analyses 332 13.3 Control of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method in Decoherence-Free Subspaces 336 13.3.1 Problem Description 336 13.3.2 Control Design in the Interaction Picture 338 13.3.3 Construction of P and Convergence Analysis 339 13.3.4 Numerical Simulation Examples and Discussion 345 References 348 14 Dynamic Decoupling Quantum Control Methods 351 14.1 Phase Decoherence Suppression of an n-Level Atom in Ξ;-Configuration with Bang-Bang Controls 351 14.1.1 Dynamical Decoupling Mechanism 352 14.1.2 Design of the Bang–Bang Operations Group in Phase Decoherence 355 14.1.3 Examples of Design 357 14.2 Optimized Dynamical Decoupling in Ξ-Type n-Level Atom 360 14.2.1 Periodic Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.2 Uhrig Dynamical Decoupling 361 14.2.3 Behaviors of Quantum Coherence under Various Dynamical Decoupling Schemes 362 14.2.4 Examples 365 14.2.5 Discussion 366 14.3 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Strategy to Suppress Decoherence 366 14.3.1 Universal Dynamical Decoupling for a Qubit 367 14.3.2 An Optimized Dynamical Decoupling Scheme 369 14.3.3 Simulation and Comparison 369 14.3.4 Discussion 375 References 378 15 Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 381 15.1 Orbit Tracking of Quantum States Based on the Lyapunov Method 382 15.1.1 Description of the System Model 382 15.1.2 Design of Control Law 384 15.1.3 Numerical Simulation Experiments and Results Analysis 385 15.2 Orbit Tracking Control of Quantum Systems 389 15.2.1 System Model and Control Law Design 390 15.2.2 Numerical Simulation Experiments 391 15.3 Adaptive Trajectory Tracking of Quantum Systems 394 15.3.1 Description of the System Model 396 15.3.2 Control System Design and Characteristic Analysis 398 15.3.3 Numerical Simulation and Result Analysis 400 15.4 Convergence of Orbit Tracking for Quantum Systems 402 15.4.1 Description of the Control System Model 403 15.4.2 Control Law Derivation 404 15.4.3 Convergence Analysis 404 15.4.4 Applications and Experimental Results Analyses 411 References 416 Index 419

Read more less

Book SynopsisWireless Communications Systems Design provides the basic knowledge and methodology for wireless communications design. The book mainly focuses on a broadband wireless communication system based on OFDM/OFDMA system because it is widely used in the modern wireless communication system.Table of ContentsPreface xi List of Abbreviations xiii Part I Wireless Communications Theory 1 1 Historical Sketch of Wireless Communications 3 1.1 Advancement of Wireless Communications Technologies 3 1.2 Wireless Communications, Lifestyles, and Economics 6 References 9 2 Probability Theory 11 2.1 Random Signals 11 2.2 Spectral Density 16 2.3 Correlation Functions 18 2.4 Central Limit Theorem 25 2.5 Problems 28 Reference 30 3 Wireless Channels 31 3.1 Additive White Gaussian Noise 31 3.2 Large]Scale Path Loss Models 34 3.3 Multipath Channels 38 3.4 Empirical Wireless Channel Models 46 3.5 Problems 48 References 50 4 Optimum Receiver 51 4.1 Decision Theory 51 4.2 Optimum Receiver for AWGN 55 4.3 Matched Filter Receiver 66 4.4 Coherent and Noncoherent Detection 69 4.5 Problems 73 References 74 5 Wireless Channel Impairment Mitigation Techniques 75 5.1 Diversity Techniques 75 5.2 Error Control Coding 82 5.2.1 Linear Block Codes 84 5.2.2 Convolutional Codes 92 5.3 MIMO 99 5.4 Equalization 107 5.5 OFDM 114 5.6 Problems 120 References 121 Part II Wireless Communications Blocks Design 123 6 Error Correction Codes 125 6.1 Turbo Codes 125 6.1.1 Turbo Encoding and Decoding Algorithm 125 6.1.2 Example of Turbo Encoding and Decoding 133 6.1.3 Hardware Implementation of Turbo Encoding and Decoding 149 6.2 Turbo Product Codes 155 6.2.1 Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding Algorithm 155 6.2.2 Example of Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding 156 6.2.3 Hardware Implementation of Turbo Product Encoding and Decoding 174 6.3 Low]Density Parity Check Codes 175 6.3.1 LDPC Encoding and Decoding Algorithms 175 6.3.2 Example of LDPC Encoding and Decoding 191 6.3.3 Hardware Implementation of LDPC Encoding and Decoding 199 6.4 Problems 205 References 206 7 Orthogonal Frequency]Division Multiplexing 209 7.1 OFDM System Design 209 7.2 FFT Design 217 7.3 Hardware Implementations of FFT 232 7.4 Problems 237 References 238 8 Multiple Input Multiple Output 239 8.1 MIMO Antenna Design 239 8.2 Space Time Coding 240 8.3 Example of STTC Encoding and Decoding 254 8.4 Spatial Multiplexing and MIMO Detection Algorithms 266 8.5 Problems 276 References 277 9 Channel Estimation and Equalization 279 9.1 Channel Estimation 279 9.2 Channel Estimation for MIMO–OFDM System 293 9.3 Equalization 295 9.4 Hardware Implementation of Channel Estimation and Equalizer for OFDM System 298 9.5 Problems 298 References 299 10 Synchronization 301 10.1 Fundamental Synchronization Techniques for OFDM System 301 10.2 Synchronization Errors 305 10.3 Synchronization Techniques for OFDM System 310 10.4 Hardware Implementation of OFDM Synchronization 319 10.5 Problems 320 References 321 Part III Wireless Communications Systems Design 323 11 Radio Planning 325 11.1 Radio Planning and Link Budget Analysis 325 11.2 Traffic Engineering 335 11.3 Problems 345 References 347 12 Wireless Communications Systems Design and Considerations 349 12.1 Wireless Communications Systems Design Flow 349 12.2 Wireless Communications Systems Design Considerations 353 12.3 Hardware and Software Codesign 370 12.4 Problems 377 References 378 13 Wireless Communications Blocks Integration 379 13.1 High Level View of Wireless Communications Systems 379 13.2 4G Physical Layer Systems 383 13.2.1 LTE 384 13.2.2 WiMAX 394 13.2.3 Comparison of LTE and WiMAX 400 13.3 SoC Design for 4G Communication System 401 13.3.1 Software Design for 4G Communication System 403 13.3.2 Hardware Design for 4G Communication System 404 13.4 Problems 409 References 410 Index 411

Read more less

Book SynopsisAs demand for data increases, Smart Data Pricing fills a market void in information on telecommunication economics. The book carefully addresses technical issues and workplace policies, system development and integration, research proposals, and business assessments.Table of Contentsforeword xv preface xvi contributors xx I Smart Data Pricing in Today’s Ecosystem 1 1 Will Smart Pricing Finally Take Off? 3Andrew Odlyzko 2 Customer Price Sensitivity to Broadband Service Speed: What Are the Implications for Public Policy? 35Victor Glass, Stela Stefanova, and Ron Dibelka 3 Network Neutrality with Content Caching and Its Effect on Access Pricing 47Fatih Kocak, George Kesidis, and Serge Fdida II Technologies for Smart Data Pricing 67 4 Pricing under Demand Flexibility and Predictability 69Ozgur Dalkilic, John Tadrous, Atilla Eryilmaz, and Hesham El-Gamal 5 Dual Pricing Algorithms by Wireless Network Duality for Utility Maximization 97Chee Wei Tan and Liang Zheng 6 Human Factors in Smart Data Pricing 127Soumya Sen, Carlee Joe-Wong, Sangtae Ha, and Mung Chiang III Usage-Based Pricing 167 7 Quantifying the Costs of Customers for Usage-Based Pricing 169László Gyarmati, Rade Stanojevic, Michael Sirivianos, and Nikolaos Laoutaris 8 Usage-Based Pricing Differentiation for Communication Networks: Incomplete Information and Limited Pricing Choices 195Shuqin Li and Jianwei Huang 9 Telecommunication Pricing: Smart Versus Dumb Pipes 241Atanu Lahiri IV Content-Based Pricing 267 10 Economic Models of Sponsored Content in Wireless Networks with Uncertain Demand 269Matthew Andrews, Ulas Ozen, Martin I. Reiman, and Qiong Wang 11 CDN Pricing and Investment Strategies under Competition 289Yang Song, Lixin Gao, and Arun Venkataramani 12 Smart Pricing and Market Formation in Hybrid Networks 321Aris M. Ouksel, Doug Lundquist, and Sid Bhattacharyya 13 To Tax or To Subsidize: The Economics of User-Generated Content Platforms 341Shaolei Ren and Mihaela van der Schaar V Managing Content Delivery 363 14 Spare Capacity Monetization by Opportunistic Content Scheduling 365Bell Labs and Alcatel-Lucent 15 Asynchronous Content Delivery and Pricing in Cellular Data Networks 391Vijay Gabale, Umamaheswari Devi, Ravi Kokku, and Shivkumar Kalyanraman 16 Mechanisms for Quota Aware Video Adaptation 415Jiasi Chen, Amitabha Ghosh, and Mung Chiang 17 The Role of Multicast in Congestion Alleviation 441Alan D. Young VI Pricing in the Cloud 453 18 Smart Pricing of Cloud Resources 455Yu Xiang and Tian Lan 19 Allocating and Pricing Data Center Resources with Power-Aware Combinatorial Auctions 477Benjamin Lubin and David C. Parkes Index 501

Read more less

Book SynopsisA realistic and comprehensive review of joint approaches to machine learning and signal processing algorithms, with application to communications, multimedia, and biomedical engineering systems Digital Signal Processing with Kernel Methods reviews the milestones in the mixing of classical digital signal processing models and advanced kernel machines statistical learning tools. It explains the fundamental concepts from both fields of machine learning and signal processing so that readers can quickly get up to speed in order to begin developing the concepts and application software in their own research. Digital Signal Processing with Kernel Methods provides a comprehensive overview of kernel methods in signal processing, without restriction to any application field. It also offers example applications and detailed benchmarking experiments with real and synthetic datasets throughout. Readers can find further worked examples with Matlab source code on a website developed by the authors: hTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgements xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii Part I Fundamentals and Basic Elements 1 1 From Signal Processing to Machine Learning 3 1.1 A New Science is Born: Signal Processing 3 1.1.1 Signal Processing Before Being Coined 3 1.1.2 1948: Birth of the Information Age 4 1.1.3 1950s: Audio Engineering Catalyzes Signal Processing 4 1.2 From Analog to Digital Signal Processing 5 1.2.1 1960s: Digital Signal Processing Begins 5 1.2.2 1970s: Digital Signal Processing Becomes Popular 6 1.2.3 1980s: Silicon Meets Digital Signal Processing 6 1.3 Digital Signal Processing Meets Machine Learning 7 1.3.1 1990s: New Application Areas 7 1.3.2 1990s: Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic, and Genetic Optimization 7 1.4 Recent Machine Learning in Digital Signal Processing 8 1.4.1 Traditional Signal Assumptions Are No Longer Valid 8 1.4.2 Encoding Prior Knowledge 8 1.4.3 Learning and Knowledge from Data 9 1.4.4 From Machine Learning to Digital Signal Processing 9 1.4.5 From Digital Signal Processing to Machine Learning 10 2 Introduction to Digital Signal Processing 13 2.1 Outline of the Signal Processing Field 13 2.1.1 Fundamentals on Signals and Systems 14 2.1.2 Digital Filtering 21 2.1.3 Spectral Analysis 24 2.1.4 Deconvolution 28 2.1.5 Interpolation 30 2.1.6 System Identification 31 2.1.7 Blind Source Separation 36 2.2.3 Sparsity, Compressed Sensing, and Dictionary Learning 44 2.3 Multidimensional Signals and Systems 48 2.3.1 Multidimensional Signals 49 2.3.2 Multidimensional Systems 51 2.4 Spectral Analysis on Manifolds 52 2.4.1 Theoretical Fundamentals 52 2.4.2 Laplacian Matrices 54 2.5 Tutorials and Application Examples 57 2.5.1 Real and Complex Signal Processing and Representations 57 2.5.2 Convolution, Fourier Transform, and Spectrum 63 2.5.3 Continuous-Time Signals and Systems 67 2.5.4 Filtering Cardiac Signals 70 2.5.5 Nonparametric Spectrum Estimation 74 2.5.6 Parametric Spectrum Estimation 77 2.5.7 Source Separation 81 2.5.8 Time–Frequency Representations and Wavelets 84 2.5.9 Examples for Spectral Analysis on Manifolds 87 2.6 Questions and Problems 94 3 Signal Processing Models 97 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Vector Spaces, Basis, and Signal Models 98 3.2.1 Basic Operations for Vectors 98 3.2.2 Vector Spaces 100 3.2.3 Hilbert Spaces 101 3.2.4 Signal Models 102 3.2.5 Complex Signal Models 104 3.2.6 Standard Noise Models in Digital Signal Processing 105 3.2.7 The Role of the Cost Function 107 3.2.8 The Role of the Regularizer 109 3.3 Digital Signal Processing Models 111 3.3.1 Sinusoidal Signal Models 112 3.3.2 System Identification Signal Models 113 3.3.3 Sinc Interpolation Models 116 3.3.4 Sparse Deconvolution 120 3.3.5 Array Processing 121 3.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 122 3.4.1 Examples of Noise Models 123 3.4.2 Autoregressive Exogenous System Identification Models 132 3.4.3 Nonlinear System Identification Using Volterra Models 138 3.4.4 Sinusoidal Signal Models 140 3.4.5 Sinc-based Interpolation 144 3.4.6 Sparse Deconvolution 152 3.4.7 Array Processing 157 3.5 Questions and Problems 160 3.A MATLABsimpleInterp Toolbox Structure 161 4 Kernel Functions and Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 165 4.1 Introduction 165 4.2 Kernel Functions and Mappings 169 4.2.1 Measuring Similarity with Kernels 169 4.2.2 Positive-Definite Kernels 169 4.2.3 Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Space and Reproducing Property 170 4.2.4 Mercer’s Theorem 173 4.3 Kernel Properties 174 4.3.1 Tikhonov’s Regularization 175 4.3.2 Representer Theorem and Regularization Properties 176 4.3.3 Basic Operations with Kernels 178 4.4 Constructing Kernel Functions 179 4.4.1 Standard Kernels 179 4.4.2 Properties of Kernels 180 4.4.3 Engineering Signal Processing Kernels 181 4.5 Complex Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Spaces 184 4.6 Support Vector Machine Elements for Regression and Estimation 186 4.6.1 Support Vector Regression Signal Model and Cost Function 186 4.6.2 Minimizing Functional 187 4.7 Tutorials and Application Examples 191 4.7.1 Kernel Calculations and Kernel Matrices 191 4.7.2 Basic Operations with Kernels 194 4.7.3 Constructing Kernels 197 4.7.4 Complex Kernels 199 4.7.5 Application Example for Support Vector Regression Elements 202 4.8 Concluding Remarks 205 4.9 Questions and Problems 205 Part II Function Approximation and Adaptive Filtering 209 5 A Support Vector Machine Signal Estimation Framework 211 5.1 Introduction 211 5.2 A Framework for Support Vector Machine Signal Estimation 213 5.3 Primal Signal Models for Support Vector Machine Signal Processing 216 5.3.1 Nonparametric Spectrum and System Identification 218 5.3.2 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Digital Communications 220 5.3.3 Convolutional Signal Models 222 5.3.4 Array Processing 225 5.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 227 5.4.1 Nonparametric Spectral Analysis with Primal Signal Models 227 5.4.2 System Identification with Primal Signal Model ;;-filter 228 5.4.3 Parametric Spectral Density Estimation with Primal Signal Models 230 5.4.4 Temporal Reference Array Processing with Primal Signal Models 231 5.4.5 Sinc Interpolation with Primal Signal Models 233 6 Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Space Models for Signal Processing 241 6.1 Introduction 241 6.2 Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Space Signal Models 242 6.2.1 Kernel Autoregressive Exogenous Identification 244 6.2.2 Kernel Finite Impulse Response and the ;;-Filter 247 6.2.3 Kernel Array Processing with Spatial Reference 248 6.2.4 Kernel Semiparametric Regression 249 6.3 Tutorials and Application Examples 258 6.3.1 Nonlinear System Identification with Support Vector Machine–Autoregressive and Moving Average 258 6.3.2 Nonlinear System Identification with the ;;-filter 260 6.3.3 Electric Network Modeling with Semiparametric Regression 264 6.3.4 Promotional Data 272 6.3.5 Spatial and Temporal Antenna Array Kernel Processing 275 6.4 Questions and Problems 279 7 Dual Signal Models for Signal Processing 281 7.1 Introduction 281 7.2 Dual Signal Model Elements 281 7.3 Dual Signal Model Instantiations 283 7.3.1 Dual Signal Model for Nonuniform Signal Interpolation 283 7.3.2 Dual Signal Model for Sparse Signal Deconvolution 284 7.3.3 Spectrally Adapted Mercer Kernels 285 7.4 Tutorials and Application Examples 289 7.4.1 Nonuniform Interpolation with the Dual Signal Model 290 7.4.2 Sparse Deconvolution with the Dual Signal Model 292 7.4.3 Doppler Ultrasound Processing for Fault Detection 294 7.4.4 Spectrally Adapted Mercer Kernels 296 7.4.5 Interpolation of Heart Rate Variability Signals 304 7.4.6 Denoising in Cardiac Motion-Mode Doppler Ultrasound Images 309?m 7.4.7 Indoor Location from Mobile Devices Measurements 316 7.4.8 Electroanatomical Maps in Cardiac Navigation Systems 322 7.5 Questions and Problems 331 8 Advances in Kernel Regression and Function Approximation 333 8.1 Introduction 333 8.2 Kernel-Based Regression Methods 333 8.2.1 Advances in Support Vector Regression 334 8.2.2 Multi-output Support Vector Regression 338 8.2.3 Kernel Ridge Regression 339 8.2.4 Kernel Signal-To-Noise Regression 341 8.2.5 Semisupervised Support Vector Regression 343 8.2.6 Model Selection in Kernel Regression Methods 345 8.4.1 Comparing Support Vector Regression, Relevance Vector Machines, and Gaussian Process Regression 360 8.4.2 Profile-Dependent Support Vector Regression 362 8.4.3 Multi-output Support Vector Regression 364 8.4.4 Kernel Signal-to-Noise Ratio Regression 366 8.4.5 Semisupervised Support Vector Regression 368 8.4.6 Bayesian Nonparametric Model 369 8.4.7 Gaussian Process Regression 370 8.4.8 Relevance Vector Machines 379 8.5 Concluding Remarks 382 8.6 Questions and Problems 383 9 Adaptive Kernel Learning for Signal Processing 387 9.1 Introduction 387 9.2 Linear Adaptive Filtering 387 9.2.1 Least Mean Squares Algorithm 388 9.2.2 Recursive Least-Squares Algorithm 389 9.3 Kernel Adaptive Filtering 392 9.4 Kernel Least Mean Squares 392 9.4.1 Derivation of Kernel Least Mean Squares 393 9.4.2 Implementation Challenges and Dual Formulation 394 9.5.3 Prediction of the Mackey–Glass Time Series with Kernel Recursive Least Squares 401 9.5.4 Beyond the Stationary Model 402 9.5.5 Example on Nonlinear Channel Identification and Reconvergence 405 9.6 Explicit Recursivity for Adaptive Kernel Models 406 9.6.1 Recursivity in Hilbert Spaces 406 9.6.2 Recursive Filters in Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 408 9.7 Online Sparsification with Kernels 411 9.7.1 Sparsity by Construction 411 9.7.2 Sparsity by Pruning 413 9.8 Probabilistic Approaches to Kernel Adaptive Filtering 414 9.8.1 Gaussian Processes and Kernel Ridge Regression 415 9.8.2 Online Recursive Solution for Gaussian Processes Regression 416 9.8.3 Kernel Recursive Least Squares Tracker 417 9.8.4 Probabilistic Kernel Least Mean Squares 418 9.9 Further Reading 418 9.9.1 Selection of Kernel Parameters 418 9.9.2 Multi-Kernel Adaptive Filtering 419 9.9.3 Recursive Filtering in Kernel Hilbert Spaces 419 9.10 Tutorials and Application Examples 419 9.10.1 Kernel Adaptive Filtering Toolbox 420 9.10.2 Prediction of a Respiratory Motion Time Series 421 9.10.3 Online Regression on the KIN?h?eK Dataset 423 9.10.4 The Mackey–Glass Time Series 425 9.10.5 Explicit Recursivity on Reproducing Kernel in Hilbert Space and Electroencephalogram Prediction 427 9.10.6 Adaptive Antenna Array Processing 428 9.11 Questions and Problems 430 Part III Classification, Detection, and Feature Extraction 433 10 Support Vector Machine and Kernel Classification Algorithms 435 10.1 Introduction 435 10.2 Support Vector Machine and Kernel Classifiers 435 10.2.1 Support Vector Machines 435 10.2.2 Multiclass and Multilabel Support Vector Machines 441 10.2.3 Least-Squares Support Vector Machine 447 10.2.4 Kernel Fisher’s Discriminant Analysis 448 10.3 Advances in Kernel-Based Classification 452 10.3.1 Large Margin Filtering 452 10.3.2 Semisupervised Learning 454 10.3.3 Multiple Kernel Learning 460 10.3.4 Structured-Output Learning 462 10.3.5 Active Learning 468 10.4 Large-Scale Support Vector Machines 477 10.4.1 Large-Scale Support Vector Machine Implementations 477 10.4.2 Random Fourier Features 478 10.4.3 Parallel Support Vector Machine 480 10.4.4 Outlook 483 10.5 Tutorials and Application Examples 485 10.5.1 Examples of Support Vector Machine Classification 485 10.5.2 Example of Least-Squares Support Vector Machine 492 10.5.3 Kernel-Filtering Support Vector Machine for Brain–Computer Interface Signal Classification 493 10.5.4 Example of Laplacian Support Vector Machine 494 10.5.5 Example of Graph-Based Label Propagation 498 10.5.6 Examples of Multiple Kernel Learning 498 10.6 Concluding Remarks 501 10.7 Questions and Problems 502 11 Clustering and Anomaly Detection with Kernels 503 11.1 Introduction 503 11.2 Kernel Clustering 506 11.2.1 Kernelization of the Metric 506 11.2.2 Clustering in Feature Spaces 508 11.3 Domain Description Via Support Vectors 514 11.3.1 Support Vector Domain Description 514 11.3.2 One-Class Support Vector Machine 515 11.3.3 Relationship Between Support Vector Domain Description and Density Estimation 516 11.3.4 Semisupervised One-Class Classification 517 11.4 Kernel Matched Subspace Detectors 518 11.4.1 Kernel Orthogonal Subspace Projection 518 11.4.2 Kernel Spectral Angle Mapper 520 11.5 Kernel Anomaly Change Detection 522 11.5.1 Linear Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 522 11.5.2 Kernel Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 523 11.6 Hypothesis Testing with Kernels 525 11.6.1 Distribution Embeddings 526 11.6.3 Maximum Mean Discrepancy 527 11.6.3 One-Class Support Measure Machine 528 11.7 Tutorials and Application Examples 529 11.7.1 Example on Kernelization of the Metric 529 11.7.2 Example on Kernel k-Means 530 11.7.3 Domain Description Examples 531 11.7.4 Kernel Spectral Angle Mapper and Kernel Orthogonal Subspace Projection Examples 534 11.7.5 Example of Kernel Anomaly Change Detection Algorithms 536 11.7.6 Example on Distribution Embeddings and Maximum Mean Discrepancy 540 11.8 Concluding Remarks 541 11.9 Questions and Problems 542 12 Kernel Feature Extraction in Signal Processing 543 12.1 Introduction 543 12.2 Multivariate Analysis in Reproducing Kernel Hilbert Spaces 545 12.2.1 Problem Statement and Notation 545 12.2.2 Linear Multivariate Analysis 546 12.2.3 Kernel Multivariate Analysis 549 12.2.4 Multivariate Analysis Experiments 551 12.3 Feature Extraction with Kernel Dependence Estimates 555 12.3.1 Feature Extraction Using Hilbert–Schmidt Independence Criterion 556 12.3.2 Blind Source Separation Using Kernels 563 12.4 Extensions for Large-Scale and Semisupervised Problems 570 12.4.2 Efficiency with the Incomplete Cholesky Decomposition 570 12.4.3 Efficiency with Random Fourier Features 570 12.4.3 Sparse Kernel Feature Extraction 571 12.4.4 Semisupervised Kernel Feature Extraction 573 12.5 Domain Adaptation with Kernels 575 12.5.1 Kernel Mean Matching 578 12.5.2 Transfer Component Analysis 579 12.5.3 Kernel Manifold Alignment 581 12.5.4 Relations between Domain Adaptation Methods 585 12.5.5 Experimental Comparison between Domain Adaptation Methods 12.6 Concluding Remarks 587 12.7 Questions and Problems 588 References 589Index 631

Read more less

Book SynopsisA methodologically sophisticated, comprehensive approach to applying the Agile fixed-price contract to IT projects while maximizing customer and supplier relationships Interesting and necessary for IT managers and IT lawyers. ?Walter J. Jaburek, Dipl.-Ing., Dr. iur., Dr. techn. Approximately 50 percent of software developers use Scrum, an iterative and incremental development method for managing software projects and product or application development, in their work. The benefit of Scrum and other Agile methods is that they can address shifts in a large project that traditional managerial methods cannot. Written by pioneers and leaders in the field of Agile and Scrum, Agile Contracts is the only book dedicated exclusively to the legal, procurement, and project management considerations of Agile contracts. Providing templates, a toolbox, and examples of Agile fixed-price contracts, the book presents an alternative option to fixed-price, time-bTrade Review“Given what FAR says so eloquently and the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) and Office of Federal Procurement Policy have reaffirmed, it is not surprising that on June 14, 2012, the OMB provided a 25-page memorandum providing guidance to support modular development that specifically addressed the practices and issues raised here. I recommend this book to all members of any integrated product team tasked with IT acquisition and contracting.” (Computing Reviews, 7 January 2013)Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xiii 1. Agility: What Is That? 1 1.1 The Agile Manifesto of 2001 6 1.2 Agile Development Based on Scrum 11 1.2.1 The Principles of Organization 14 1.2.2 The Process Model 14 1.2.3 Estimation in Scrum 19 1.3 Agility from the Perspective of Procurement 23 1.4 Agility from the Perspective of the Software Provider 25 1.5 The 12 Principles of Agile Software Development 26 1.6 Summary 32 2. The Missing Piece of the Puzzle 33 2.1 The Problems with Traditional Fixed-Price Contracts 37 2.2 The Problems with Time and Materials Contracts 43 2.3 Something New: The Agile Fixed-Price Contract 44 2.4 Summary 45 3. What Is an Agile Fixed-Price Contract? 47 3.1 Existing Approaches 48 3.2 The Agile Fixed-Price Contract 49 3.2.1 How Is an Agile Fixed-Price Contract Set Up? 50 3.3 Summary 71 4. Sample of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 73 Preamble 74 §1 Definitions and Clarifications of Terms 75 §2 Contract Scope and Hierarchy of Documents 78 §3 Usage Rights 79 §4 Transparency and “Open Books” 79 §5 Acceptance 80 §6 Obligation of Both Parties to Co-Operate 81 §7 Client’s Obligations 84 §8 Escalation to the Steering Board and the Independent Experts 84 §9 Project Period 85 §10 Warranty, Compensation, and Indemnifi cation 86 §11 Limitation of Liability 86 §12 Contractor’s Compensation 87 §13 Force Majeure 87 §14 Secrecy 87 §15 Severability Clause 88 §16 Place of Performance, Jurisdiction, and Applicable Law 88 Appendix A: Commercial Agreements 88 Prices 88 Commercial Approach to the Project 90 Payment Milestones 92 Appendix B: Technical Scope and Process 92 Requirements: Backlog and Vision 92 Process for Development and Approval 93 Changes to the Contract (Exchange for Free) 95 Deliverables and Services 97 Mechanism to Calculate Costs of Future User Stories 98 Appendix C: 12 Principles of Cooperation 101 Appendix D: Quality Standards—Definition of Done 107 5. Tendering Based on an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 109 5.1 Appropriate Tender Content for an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 112 5.2 Requirements for Tendering and Selection 116 5.2.1 Competition 116 5.2.2 Comparability and Transparency 119 5.3 Tendering Steps with a Focus on Agile Fixed Price 122 5.3.1 Internal Goal Setting and Coordination 123 5.3.2 Preparation for the Invitation to Tender 124 5.3.3 Tender 126 5.3.4 Awarding of the Tender 130 5.3.5 Price Optimization Options 132 5.3.6 Project and Contract Management 134 5.3.7 Effort Inherent in the Tendering Process 134 5.4 Summary 134 6. Special Requirements for the Legal Framework of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 137 6.1 Adaptable System for Scope 139 6.2 Warranty and Damages 140 6.3 Schedule and Milestones 141 6.4 Path of Escalation 142 6.5 Obligations 143 6.6 Summary 143 7. Guideline for the Negotiation of an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 145 7.1 Objectives of the Client 147 7.2 Objectives of the Contractor 148 7.3 Objectives and Bonus Payouts of the People Involved 149 7.4 Strategy for the Project and the Negotiation 151 7.5 Tactics for the Negotiation 152 7.6 Price Determination 155 7.7 Conclusion of the Negotiation and Project Steering 155 7.8 Conclusions 156 8. Advantages and Disadvantages of Agile Fixed-Price Contracts 157 8.1 Detailed Analysis of the Pros and Cons 158 8.1.1 Budget Security 159 8.1.2 Requirement Flexibility 159 8.1.3 Detailed Requirements 160 8.1.4 Negotiating Costs 160 8.1.5 Estimate Security 160 8.1.6 Quality Risk 160 8.1.7 Price Elevation Tendency 161 8.1.8 Probability of Winning a Project Tender 161 8.1.9 Cost Risk 161 8.1.10 Security to Deliver a Project as a Whole 161 8.1.11 Acceptance Efforts 174 8.1.12 Pricing Transparency 174 8.1.13 Progress Transparency 174 8.1.14 Permanent Regulation 174 8.1.15 Securing the Investment 174 8.2 Summary and Overview 182 8.3 Conclusions 184 9. Toolbox for Agile Fixed-Price Contracts 185 9.1 Stimulating Interest Before the Negotiation 186 9.2 Identifying Issues of the Other Party 189 9.3 Establishing Common Language and Experiences 189 9.4 Feature Shoot-out 191 9.5 The Black Swan Scenario 192 9.6 Workshop on Contract Setup 192 9.7 Reports and Metrics 196 9.7.1 KISS Backlog View 196 9.7.2 Focus: There Is a Single Goal! 197 10. Practical Examples 199 10.1 Example 1: Software Integration in a Migration Project 200 10.1.1 Initial Situation 200 10.1.2 Contract and Procedure for Traditional Methodologies 202 10.1.3 Contract and Procedure for Agile Methodologies 213 10.1.4 Contract for Example 1 222 10.2 Example 2: Creating a Software Product 240 10.2.1 Initial Situation 241 10.2.2 Contract and Procedure for a Traditional Fixed-Price Contract 241 10.2.3 Contract and Procedure for a Time and Materials Contract 253 10.2.4 Contract and Procedure for an Agile Fixed-Price Contract 261 10.2.5 Conclusions 268 Appendix: Questions and Answers 271 References 275 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddresses the practical issues of current and future electric and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEVs), and focuses primarily on power electronics and motor drives based solutions for electric vehicle (EV) technologies.Table of ContentsForeword xix Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxv List of Contributors xxvii 1 Energy, Global Warming and Impact of Power Electronics in the Present Century 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Energy 2 1.3 Environmental Pollution: Global Warming Problem 3 1.4 Impact of Power Electronics on Energy Systems 8 1.5 Smart Grid 20 1.6 Electric/Hybrid Electric Vehicles 21 1.7 Conclusion and Future Prognosis 23 References 25 2 Challenges of the Current Energy Scenario: The Power Electronics Contribution 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Energy Transmission and Distribution Systems 28 2.3 Renewable Energy Systems 34 2.4 Transportation Systems 41 2.5 Energy Storage Systems 42 2.6 Conclusions 47 References 47 3 An Overview on Distributed Generation and Smart Grid Concepts and Technologies 50 3.1 Introduction 50 3.2 Requirements of Distributed Generation Systems and Smart Grids 51 3.3 Photovoltaic Generators 52 3.4 Wind and Mini-hydro Generators 55 3.5 Energy Storage Systems 56 3.6 Electric Vehicles 57 3.7 Microgrids 57 3.8 Smart Grid Issues 59 3.9 Active Management of Distribution Networks 60 3.10 Communication Systems in Smart Grids 61 3.11 Advanced Metering Infrastructure and Real-Time Pricing 62 3.12 Standards for Smart Grids 63 References 65 4 Recent Advances in Power Semiconductor Technology 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Silicon Power Transistors 70 4.3 Overview of SiC Transistor Designs 75 4.4 Gate and Base Drivers for SiC Devices 80 4.5 Parallel Connection of Transistors 89 4.6 Overview of Applications 97 4.7 Gallium Nitride Transistors 100 4.8 Summary 102 References 102 5 AC-Link Universal Power Converters: A New Class of Power Converters for Renewable Energy and Transportation 107 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Hard Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 108 5.3 Soft Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 112 5.4 Principle of Operation of the Soft Switching ac-Link Universal Power Converter 113 5.5 Design Procedure 122 5.6 Analysis 123 5.7 Applications 126 5.8 Summary 133 Acknowledgment 133 References 133 6 High Power Electronics: Key Technology forWind Turbines 136 6.1 Introduction 136 6.2 Development of Wind Power Generation 137 6.3 Wind Power Conversion 138 6.4 Power Converters for Wind Turbines 143 6.5 Power Semiconductors for Wind Power Converter 149 6.6 Controls and Grid Requirements for Modern Wind Turbines 150 6.7 Emerging Reliability Issues for Wind Power System 155 6.8 Conclusion 156 References 156 7 Photovoltaic Energy Conversion Systems 160 7.1 Introduction 160 7.2 Power Curves and Maximum Power Point of PV Systems 162 7.3 Grid-Connected PV System Configurations 165 7.4 Control of Grid-Connected PV Systems 181 7.5 Recent Developments in Multilevel Inverter-Based PV Systems 192 7.6 Summary 195 References 195 8 Controllability Analysis of Renewable Energy Systems 199 8.1 Introduction 199 8.2 Zero Dynamics of the Nonlinear System 201 8.3 Controllability of Wind Turbine Connected through L Filter to the Grid 202 8.4 Controllability of Wind Turbine Connected through LCL Filter to the Grid 208 8.5 Controllability and Stability Analysis of PV System Connected to Current Source Inverter 219 8.6 Conclusions 228 References 229 9 Universal Operation of Small/Medium-Sized Renewable Energy Systems 231 9.1 Distributed Power Generation Systems 231 9.2 Control of Power Converters for Grid-Interactive Distributed Power Generation Systems 243 9.3 Ancillary Feature 259 9.4 Summary 267 References 268 10 Properties and Control of a Doubly Fed Induction Machine 270 10.1 Introduction. Basic principles of DFIM 270 10.2 Vector Control of DFIM Using an AC/DC/AC Converter 280 10.3 DFIM-Based Wind Energy Conversion Systems 305 References 317 11 AC–DC–AC Converters for Distributed Power Generation Systems 319 11.1 Introduction 319 11.2 Pulse-Width Modulation for AC–DC–AC Topologies 328 11.3 DC-Link Capacitors Voltage Balancing in Diode-Clamped Converter 334 11.4 Control Algorithms for AC–DC–AC Converters 345 11.5 AC–DC–AC Converter with Active Power FeedForward 356 11.6 Summary and Conclusions 361 References 362 12 Power Electronics for More Electric Aircraft 365 12.1 Introduction 365 12.2 More Electric Aircraft 367 12.3 More Electric Engine (MEE) 372 12.4 Electric Power Generation Strategies 374 12.5 Power Electronics and Power Conversion 378 12.6 Power Distribution 381 12.7 Conclusions 384 References 385 13 Electric and Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicles 387 13.1 Introduction 387 13.2 Electric, Hybrid Electric and Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle Topologies 388 13.3 EV and PHEV Charging Infrastructures 392 13.4 Power Electronics for EV and PHEV Charging Infrastructure 404 13.5 Vehicle-to-Grid (V2G) and Vehicle-to-Home (V2H) Concepts 407 13.6 Power Electronics for PEV Charging 410 References 419 14 Multilevel Converter/Inverter Topologies and Applications 422 14.1 Introduction 422 14.2 Fundamentals of Multilevel Converters/Inverters 423 14.3 Cascaded Multilevel Inverters and Their Applications 432 14.4 Emerging Applications and Discussions 444 14.5 Summary 459 Acknowledgment 461 References 461 15 Multiphase Matrix Converter Topologies and Control 463 15.1 Introduction 463 15.2 Three-Phase Input with Five-Phase Output Matrix Converter 464 15.3 Simulation and Experimental Results 484 15.4 Matrix Converter with Five-Phase Input and Three-Phase Output 488 15.5 Sample Results 499 Acknowledgment 501 References 501 16 Boost Preregulators for Power Factor Correction in Single-Phase Rectifiers 503 16.1 Introduction 503 16.2 Basic Boost PFC 504 16.3 Half-Bridge Asymmetric Boost PFC 511 16.4 Interleaved Dual-Boost PFC 519 16.5 Conclusion 528 References 529 17 Active Power Filter 534 17.1 Introduction 534 17.2 Harmonics 535 17.3 Effects and Negative Consequences of Harmonics 535 17.4 International Standards for Harmonics 536 17.5 Types of Harmonics 537 17.5.1 Harmonic Current Sources 537 17.5.2 Harmonic Voltage Sources 537 17.6 Passive Filters 539 17.7 Power Definitions 540 17.8 Active Power Filters 543 17.9 APF Switching Frequency Choice Methodology 547 17.10 Harmonic Current Extraction Techniques (HCET) 548 17.11 Shunt Active Power Filter 555 17.12 Series Active Power Filter 564 17.13 Unified Power Quality Conditioner 565 Acknowledgment 569 References 569 18A Hardware-in-the-Loop Systems with Power Electronics: A Powerful Simulation Tool 573 18A.1 Background 573 18A.2 Increasing the Performance of the Power Stage 575 18A.3 Machine Model of an Asynchronous Machine 581 18A.4 Results and Conclusions 583 References 589 18B Real-Time Simulation of Modular Multilevel Converters (MMCs) 591 18B.1 Introduction 591 18B.2 Choice of Modeling for MMC and Its Limitations 597 18B.3 Hardware Technology for Real-Time Simulation 598 18B.4 Implementation for Real-Time Simulator Using Different Approach 601 18B.5 Conclusion 606 References 606 19 Model Predictive Speed Control of Electrical Machines 608 19.1 Introduction 608 19.2 Review of Classical Speed Control Schemes for Electrical Machines 609 19.3 Predictive Current Control 613 19.4 Predictive Torque Control 617 19.5 Predictive Torque Control Using a Direct Matrix Converter 619 19.6 Predictive Speed Control 622 19.7 Conclusions 626 Acknowledgment 627 References 627 20 The Electrical Drive Systems with the Current Source Converter 630 20.1 Introduction 630 20.2 The Drive System Structure 631 20.3 The PWM in CSCs 633 20.4 The Generalized Control of a CSR 636 20.5 The Mathematical Model of an Asynchronous and a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 639 20.6 The Current and Voltage Control of an Induction Machine 641 20.7 The Current and Voltage Control of Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor 651 20.8 The Control System of a Doubly Fed Motor Supplied by a CSC 657 20.9 Conclusion 661 References 662 21 Common-Mode Voltage and Bearing Currents in PWM Inverters: Causes, Effects and Prevention 664 21.1 Introduction 664 21.2 Determination of the Induction Motor Common-Mode Parameters 671 21.3 Prevention of Common-Mode Current: Passive Methods 674 21.4 Active Systems for Reducing the CM Current 682 21.5 Common-Mode Current Reduction by PWM Algorithm Modifications 683 21.6 Summary 692 References 692 22 High-Power Drive Systems for Industrial Applications: Practical Examples 695 22.1 Introduction 695 22.2 LNG Plants 696 22.3 Gas Turbines (GTs): the Conventional Compressor Drives 697 22.4 Technical and Economic Impact of VFDs 699 22.5 High-Power Electric Motors 700 22.6 High-Power Electric Drives 705 22.7 Switching Devices 705 22.8 High-Power Converter Topologies 709 22.9 Multilevel VSI Topologies 711 22.10 Control of High-Power Electric Drives 719 22.11 Conclusion 723 Acknowledgment 724 References 724 23 Modulation and Control of Single-Phase Grid-Side Converters 727 23.1 Introduction 727 23.2 Modulation Techniques in Single-Phase Voltage Source Converters 729 23.3 Control of AC–DC Single-Phase Voltage Source Converters 748 23.4 Summary 763 References 763 24 Impedance Source Inverters 766 24.1 Multilevel Inverters 766 24.2 Quasi-Z-Source Inverter 767 24.3 qZSI-Based Cascade Multilevel PV System 775 24.4 Hardware Implementation 780 Acknowledgments 782 References 782 Index 787

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe search for alternative energy sources to offset diminishing resources of easy and cost-effective fossil fuels has become a global initiative. Fuel generated from biomass is a leading competitor in this arena.Trade Review"Summing Up: Recommended. Upper-division undergraduates through professionals." (Choice, 1 June 2013)Table of ContentsPreface xvii List of Contributors xix 1 Introduction to Biofuels 1 Pramod Kumar and Vikash Babu 1.1 Global Scenario of Biofuel Production and Economy 4 References 7 2 Advances in Biofuel Production 11 M.D. Berni, I.L. Dorileo, J.M. Prado, T. Forster-Carneiro and M.A.A. Meireles 2.1 Introduction 12 2.2 Advances in the Production of First, Second and Third Generation Biofuels 16 2.3 Future Trends of Biofuels Development 44 2.3 Conclusions 54 Acknowledgements 55 References 55 3 Processing of Biofuels 59 Divya Gupta, Ajeet Singh, Ashwani Sharma and Anshul Nigam 3.1 Introduction 59 3.2 Biodiesel from Algae 61 3.3 Cellulosic Ethanol 72 3.4 Syngas 78 3.5 Conclusion 80 References 80 4 Bioconversion of Lignocellulosic Biomass for Bioethanol Production 85 Virendra Kumar, Purnima Dhall, Rita Kumar and Anil Kumar 4.1 Introduction 86 4.2 Bioethanol Production Process 90 4.3 Genetic Engineering for Bioethanol Production 109 4.4 Future Perspective 111 References 112 5 Recent Progress on Microbial Metabolic Engineering for the Conversion of Lignocellulose Waste for Biofuel Production 119 Shubhangini Sharma, Reena, Anil Kumar and Pallavi Mittal 5.1 Introduction 120 5.2 Role of Genetic and Metabolic Engineering in Biofuel Production 122 5.3 Problems with Different Biofuels and Areas of Improvement 124 5.4 General Process of Metabolic Engineering 127 5.5 Metabolic Engineering in Different Microorganisms 133 5.6 Conclusion 141 References 142 6 Microbial Production of Biofuels 147 Panwar AS, Jugran J and Joshi GK 6.1 Introduction 147 6.2 Types of Biofuels Produced Through Microorganisms 149 6.3 Future Prospects and Conclusion 163 References 165 7 Microalgae in Biofuel Production-Current Status and Future Prospects 167 Navneet Singh Chaudhary 7.1 Introduction 168 7.2 Microalgae in Biofuel Production 170 7.3 Comparison of Cyanobacteria with Microalgae in Biofuel Production 171 7.4 Applications of Cyanobacteria and Microalgae in Biofuel Production 172 7.5 Selection of Microalgae for Biofuel Production 177 7.6 Cultivation of Microalgae for Production of Biofuel and Co-Products 179 7.7 Harvesting and Drying of Microalgae 181 7.8 Processing, Extraction and Separation of Microalgae 182 7.9 Biofuels and Co-Products from Microalgae 184 7.10 Challenges and Hurdles in Biofuel Production 192 7.11 Genetic and Metabolic Engineering of Microalgae for Biofuel–Bioenergy Production 198 7.12 Conclusion and Future Prospectus 204 References 206 8 Bioethanol Production Processes 211 Mohammad J. Taherzadeh, Patrik R. Lennartsson, Oliver Teichert and Håkan Nordholm 8.1 Introduction 211 8.2 Global Market for Bioethanol and Future Prospects 212 8.3 Overall Process of Bioethanol Production 213 8.4 Production of Sugars from Raw Materials 213 8.5 Characterization of Lignocellulosic Materials 218 8.6 Sugar Solution from Lignocellulosic Materials 220 8.7 Basic Concepts of Fermentation 225 8.8 Conversion of Simple Sugars to Ethanol 225 8.9 Biochemical Basis for Ethanol Production from Hexoses 226 8.10 Biochemical Basis for Ethanol Production from Pentoses 228 8.11 Microorganisms Related to Ethanol Fermentation 229 8.12 Fermentation Processes 233 8.13 Ethanol Recovery 242 8.14 Distillation 243 8.15 Alternative Processes for Ethanol Recovery and Purification 245 8.16 Ethanol Dehydration 246 8.17 Distillers’ Dried Grains with Solubles 247 8.18 Sustainability of Bioethanol Production 248 8.19 Concluding Remarks and Future Prospects 249 References 249 9 Production of Butanol: A Biofuel 255 Sapna Jain, Mukesh Kumar Yadav and Ajay Kumar 9.1 Introduction 256 9.2 Butanol and its Properties 257 9.3 Butanol as Fuel 257 9.4 Industrial applications of Butanol and its Derivatives 260 9.5 Methods for Production of Butanol 261 9.6 In situ Separation Techniques for Butanol 273 9.7 Future Prospects 279 References 280 10 Production of Biodiesel from Various Sources 285 Komal Saxena, Avinash Kumar Sharma, Lalit Agrawal and Ashish Deep Gupta 10.1 Introduction 285 10.2 Sources/Feedstocks for the Production of Biodiesel 286 10.3 Various Processes of Biodiesel Production 290 10.4 Determination of Yield, Process Optimization and Biodiesel Standardization 302 10.5 Conclusion 304 References 304 11 Bio-Hydrogen Production: Current Scenarios and Future Prospects 309 Sumita Srivastav, Prashant Anthwal, Tribhuwan Chandra and Ashish Thapliyal 11.1 Introduction 310 11.2 Conventional Methods of Hydrogen Production 310 11.3 Hydrogen from Renewables Sources 312 11.4 Methods of Hydrogen Production through Bio-Routes involving Biochemical Processes 315 11.5 Recent Advancement in Production of Bio-Hydrogen 319 11.6 Status of Biohydrogen Production 329 11.7 Conclusions 329 References 331 12 Biomethane Production 333 Ruchika Goyal, Vikash Babu and Girijesh Kumar Patel 12.1 Introduction 334 12.2 Features of Biomethane 337 12.3 Global Scenario of Biomethane 339 12.4 Biomethane Production – Waste to Fuel Technology 341 12.5 Biogas Cleaning and Upgrading 343 12.6 Conclusions 354 References 354 Index 357

Read more less

Book SynopsisFully updated edition of the comprehensive, single-source reference on satellite technology and its applications Covering both the technology and its applications, Satellite Technology is a concise reference on satellites for commercial, scientific and military purposes.Table of ContentsPreface xxi PART I SATELLITE TECHNOLOGY 1 Introduction to Satellites and their Applications 3 1.1 Ever-expanding Application Spectrum 3 1.2 What is a Satellite? 4 1.3 History of the Evolution of Satellites 7 1.3.1 Era of Hot Air Balloons and Sounding Rockets 7 1.3.2 Launch of Early Artificial Satellites 8 1.3.3 Satellites for Communications, Meteorology and Scientific Exploration -- Early Developments 10 1.3.4 Non-geosynchronous Communication Satellites: Telstar and Relay Programmes 11 1.3.5 Emergence of Geosynchronous Communication Satellites 12 1.3.6 International Communication Satellite Systems 15 1.3.7 Domestic Communication Satellite Systems 16 1.3.8 Satellites for other Applications also made Rapid Progress 19 1.3.9 Small or Miniature Satellites 22 1.4 Evolution of Launch Vehicles 27 1.5 Future Trends 33 1.5.1 Communication Satellites 33 1.5.2 Weather Forecasting Satellites 33 1.5.3 Earth Observation Satellites 33 1.5.4 Navigational Satellites 34 1.5.5 Military Satellites 35 Further Reading 35 Glossary 35 2 Satellite Orbits and Trajectories 37 2.1 Definition of an Orbit and a Trajectory 37 2.2 Orbiting Satellites -- Basic Principles 37 2.2.1 Newton’s Law of Gravitation 39 2.2.2 Newton’s Second Law of Motion 40 2.2.3 Kepler’s Laws 41 2.3 Orbital Parameters 44 2.4 Injection Velocity and Resulting Satellite Trajectories 61 2.5 Types of Satellite Orbits 67 2.5.1 Orientation of the Orbital Plane 67 2.5.2 Eccentricity of the Orbit 68 2.5.3 Distance from Earth 70 2.5.4 Sun-synchronous Orbit 73 Further Readings 76 Glossary 76 3 Satellite Launch and In-orbit Operations 79 3.1 Acquiring the Desired Orbit 79 3.1.1 Parameters Defining the Satellite Orbit 80 3.1.2 Modifying the Orbital Parameters 83 3.2 Launch Sequence 95 3.2.1 Types of Launch Sequence 95 3.3 Launch Vehicles 100 3.3.1 Introduction 100 3.3.2 Classification 100 3.3.3 Anatomy of a Launch Vehicle 104 3.3.4 Principal Parameters 106 3.3.5 Major Launch Vehicles 108 3.4 Space Centres 127 3.4.1 Location Considerations 127 3.4.2 Constituent Parts of a Space Centre 128 3.4.3 Major Space Centres 129 3.5 Orbital Perturbations 144 3.6 Satellite Stabilization 146 3.6.1 Spin Stabilization 146 3.6.2 Three-axis or Body Stabilization 147 3.6.3 Comparison between Spin-stabilized and Three-axis Stabilized Satellites 149 3.6.4 Station Keeping 149 3.7 Orbital Effects on Satellite’s Performance 149 3.7.1 Doppler Shift 149 3.7.2 Variation in the Orbital Distance 150 3.7.3 Solar Eclipse 150 3.7.4 Sun Transit Outrage 150 3.8 Eclipses 150 3.9 Look Angles of a Satellite 154 3.9.1 Azimuth Angle 154 3.9.2 Elevation Angle 155 3.9.3 Computing the Slant Range 156 3.9.4 Computing the Line-of-Sight Distance between Two Satellites 158 3.10 Earth Coverage and Ground Tracks 166 3.10.1 Satellite Altitude and the Earth Coverage Area 166 3.10.2 Satellite Ground Tracks 167 3.10.3 Orbit Inclination and Latitude Coverage 170 Further Readings 172 Glossary 172 4 Satellite Hardware 174 4.1 Satellite Subsystems 174 4.2 Mechanical Structure 175 4.2.1 Design Considerations 176 4.2.2 Typical Structure 176 4.3 Propulsion Subsystem 177 4.3.1 Basic Principle 178 4.3.2 Types of Propulsion System 178 4.4 Thermal Control Subsystem 185 4.4.1 Sources of Thermal Inequilibrium 186 4.4.2 Mechanism of Heat Transfer 186 4.4.3 Types of Thermal Control 187 4.5 Power Supply Subsystem 189 4.5.1 Types of Power System 189 4.5.2 Solar Energy Driven Power Systems 190 4.5.3 Batteries 195 4.6 Attitude and Orbit Control 199 4.6.1 Attitude Control 200 4.6.2 Orbit Control 200 4.7 Tracking, Telemetry and Command Subsystem 201 4.8 Payload 203 4.9 Antenna Subsystem 205 4.9.1 Antenna Parameters 207 4.9.2 Types of Antennas 210 4.10 Space Qualification and Equipment Reliability 224 4.10.1 Space Qualification 224 4.10.2 Reliability 225 Further Readings 226 Glossary 227 5 Communication Techniques 229 5.1 Types of Information Signals 229 5.1.1 Voice Signals 230 5.1.2 Data Signals 230 5.1.3 Video Signals 230 5.2 Amplitude Modulation 231 5.2.1 Frequency Spectrum of the AM Signal 232 5.2.2 Power in the AM Signal 233 5.2.3 Noise in the AM Signal 233 5.2.4 Different Forms of Amplitude Modulation 235 5.3 Frequency Modulation 241 5.3.1 Frequency Spectrum of the FM Signal 243 5.3.2 Narrow Band and Wide Band FM 245 5.3.3 Noise in the FM Signal 246 5.3.4 Generation of FM Signals 250 5.3.5 Detection of FM Signals 252 5.4 Pulse Communication Systems 259 5.4.1 Analogue Pulse Communication Systems 259 5.4.2 Digital Pulse Communication Systems 261 5.5 Sampling Theorem 265 5.6 Shannon--Hartley Theorem 266 5.7 Digital Modulation Techniques 267 5.7.1 Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) 268 5.7.2 Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) 268 5.7.3 Phase Shift Keying (PSK) 269 5.7.4 Differential Phase Shift Keying (DPSK) 270 5.7.5 Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) 271 5.7.6 Offset QPSK 273 5.7.7 8PSK and 16PSK 274 5.7.8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 274 5.7.9 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying (APSK) 276 5.8 Multiplexing Techniques 277 5.8.1 Frequency Division Multiplexing 277 5.8.2 Time Division Multiplexing 279 5.8.3 Code Division Multiplexing 281 Further Readings 282 Glossary 283 6 Multiple Access Techniques 286 6.1 Introduction to Multiple Access Techniques 286 6.1.1 Transponder Assignment Modes 287 6.2 Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 288 6.2.1 Demand Assigned FDMA 290 6.2.2 Pre-assigned FDMA 290 6.2.3 Calculation of C/N Ratio 290 6.3 Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) Systems 293 6.3.1 SCPC/FM/FDMA System 293 6.3.2 SCPC/PSK/FDMA System 294 6.4 Multiple Channels Per Carrier (MCPC) Systems 295 6.4.1 MCPC/FDM/FM/FDMA System 295 6.4.2 MCPC/PCM-TDM/PSK/FDMA System 296 6.5 Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 297 6.6 TDMA Frame Structure 297 6.6.1 Reference Burst 298 6.6.2 Traffic Burst 298 6.6.3 Guard Time 299 6.7 TDMA Burst Structure 299 6.7.1 Carrier and Clock Recovery Sequence 299 6.7.2 Unique Word 299 6.7.3 Signalling Channel 300 6.7.4 Traffic Information 301 6.8 Computing Unique Word Detection Probability 301 6.9 TDMA Frame Efficiency 302 6.10 Control and Coordination of Traffic 303 6.11 Frame Acquisition and Synchronization 305 6.11.1 Extraction of Traffic Bursts from Receive Frames 305 6.11.2 Transmission of Traffic Bursts 305 6.11.3 Frame Synchronization 305 6.12 FDMA vs. TDMA 307 6.12.1 Advantages of TDMA over FDMA 308 6.12.2 Disadvantages of TDMA over FDMA 308 6.13 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 308 6.13.1 DS-CDMA Transmission and Reception 309 6.13.2 Frequency Hopping CDMA (FH-CDMA) System 311 6.13.3 Time Hopping CDMA (TH-CDMA) System 313 6.13.4 Comparison of DS-CDMA, FH-CDMA and TH-CDMA Systems 314 6.14 Space Domain Multiple Access (SDMA) 316 6.14.1 Frequency Re-use in SDMA 316 6.14.2 SDMA/FDMA System 317 6.14.3 SDMA/TDMA System 318 6.14.4 SDMA/CDMA System 319 Further Readings 319 Glossary 320 7 Satellite Link Design Fundamentals 322 7.1 Transmission Equation 322 7.2 Satellite Link Parameters 324 7.2.1 Choice of Operating Frequency 324 7.2.2 Propagation Considerations 324 7.2.3 Noise Considerations 325 7.2.4 Interference-related Problems 325 7.3 Frequency Considerations 326 7.3.1 Frequency Allocation and Coordination 326 7.4 Propagation Considerations 330 7.4.1 Free-space Loss 330 7.4.2 Gaseous Absorption 331 7.4.3 Attenuation due to Rain 333 7.4.4 Cloud Attenuation 334 7.4.5 Signal Fading due to Refraction 334 7.4.6 Ionosphere-related Effects 335 7.4.7 Fading due to Multipath Signals 338 7.5 Techniques to Counter Propagation Effects 341 7.5.1 Attenuation Compensation Techniques 341 7.5.2 Depolarization Compensation Techniques 342 7.6 Noise Considerations 342 7.6.1 Thermal Noise 342 7.6.2 Noise Figure 343 7.6.3 Noise Temperature 344 7.6.4 Noise Figure and Noise Temperature of Cascaded Stages 345 7.6.5 Antenna Noise Temperature 346 7.6.6 Overall System Noise Temperature 350 7.7 Interference-related Problems 353 7.7.1 Intermodulation Distortion 354 7.7.2 Interference between the Satellite and Terrestrial Links 357 7.7.3 Interference due to Adjacent Satellites 357 7.7.4 Cross-polarization Interference 361 7.7.5 Adjacent Channel Interference 361 7.8 Antenna Gain-to-Noise Temperature (G/T) Ratio 365 7.9 Link Design 367 7.9.1 Link Design Procedure 368 7.9.2 Link Budget 368 7.10 Multiple Spot Beam Technology 371 Further Readings 374 Glossary 375 8 Earth Station 378 8.1 Earth Station 378 8.2 Types of Earth Station 380 8.2.1 Fixed Satellite Service (FSS) Earth Station 381 8.2.2 Broadcast Satellite Service (BSS) Earth Stations 382 8.2.3 Mobile Satellite Service (MSS) Earth Stations 383 8.2.4 Single Function Stations 384 8.2.5 Gateway Stations 385 8.2.6 Teleports 386 8.3 Earth Station Architecture 386 8.4 Earth Station Design Considerations 387 8.4.1 Key Performance Parameters 388 8.4.2 Earth Station Design Optimization 390 8.4.3 Environmental and Site Considerations 391 8.5 Earth Station Testing 392 8.5.1 Unit and Subsystem Level Testing 392 8.5.2 System Level Testing 392 8.6 Earth Station Hardware 398 8.6.1 RF Equipment 398 8.6.2 IF and Baseband Equipment 408 8.6.3 Terrestrial Interface 409 8.7 Satellite Tracking 412 8.7.1 Satellite Tracking System -- Block Diagram 412 8.7.2 Tracking Techniques 412 8.8 Some Representative Earth Stations 419 8.8.1 Goonhilly Satellite Earth Station 419 8.8.2 Madley Communications Centre 421 8.8.3 Madrid Deep Space Communications Complex 421 8.8.4 Canberra Deep Space Communications Complex 422 8.8.5 Goldstone Deep Space Communications Complex 423 8.8.6 Honeysuckle Creek Tracking Station 424 8.8.7 Kaena Point Satellite Tracking Station 426 8.8.8 Bukit Timah Satellite Earth Station 426 8.8.9 INTELSAT Teleport Earth Stations 426 8.8.10 SUPARCO Satellite Ground Station 428 8.8.11 Makarios Satellite Earth Station 428 8.8.12 Raisting Earth Station 428 8.8.13 Indian Deep Space Network 429 Glossary 430 9 Networking Concepts 433 9.1 Introduction 433 9.2 Network Characteristics 433 9.2.1 Availability 434 9.2.2 Reliability 434 9.2.3 Security 435 9.2.4 Throughput 436 9.2.5 Scalability 437 9.2.6 Topology 437 9.2.7 Cost 437 9.3 Applications and Services 437 9.3.1 Satellite and Network Services 438 9.3.2 Satellite Services 438 9.3.3 Network Services 438 9.3.4 Internet Services 439 9.4 Network Topologies 442 9.4.1 Bus Topology 442 9.4.2 Star Topology 443 9.4.3 Ring Topology 444 9.4.4 Mesh Topology 444 9.4.5 Tree Topology 445 9.4.6 Hybrid Topology 446 9.5 Network Technologies 447 9.5.1 Circuit Switched Networks 447 9.5.2 Packet Switched Networks 448 9.5.3 Circuit Switched versus Packet Switched Networks 449 9.6 Networking Protocols 450 9.6.1 Common Networking Protocols 450 9.6.2 The Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) Reference Model 453 9.6.3 Internet Protocol (IP) 456 9.6.4 Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) 457 9.6.5 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) 457 9.6.6 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 457 9.6.7 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 458 9.6.8 User Datagram Protocol (UDP) 458 9.6.9 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 459 9.7 Satellite Constellations 459 9.7.1 Constellation Geometry 459 9.7.2 Major Satellite Constellations 460 9.8 Internetworking with Terrestrial Networks 465 9.8.1 Repeaters, Bridges, Switches and Routers 465 9.8.2 Protocol Translation, Stacking and Tunnelling 466 9.8.3 Quality of Service 466 Further Readings 467 Glossary 467 PART II SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 10 Communication Satellites 473 10.1 Introduction to Communication Satellites 473 10.2 Communication-related Applications of Satellites 474 10.2.1 Geostationary Satellite Communication Systems 475 10.2.2 Non-geostationary Satellite Communication Systems 475 10.3 Frequency Bands 475 10.4 Payloads 475 10.4.1 Types of Transponders 477 10.4.2 Transponder Performance Parameters 478 10.5 Satellite versus Terrestrial Networks 479 10.5.1 Advantages of Satellites Over Terrestrial Networks 479 10.5.2 Disadvantages of Satellites with Respect to Terrestrial Networks 480 10.6 Satellite Telephony 481 10.6.1 Point-to-Point Trunk Telephone Networks 482 10.6.2 Mobile Satellite Telephony 482 10.7 Satellite Television 484 10.7.1 A Typical Satellite TV Network 484 10.7.2 Satellite--Cable Television 485 10.7.3 Satellite--Local Broadcast TV Network 486 10.7.4 Direct-to-Home Satellite Television 487 10.7.5 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) 490 10.7.6 DVB-S and DVB-S2 Standards 491 10.7.7 DVB-RCS and DVB-RCS2 Standards 493 10.7.8 DVB-T and DVB-T2 Standards 493 10.7.9 DVB-H and DVB-SH Standards 494 10.8 Satellite Radio 496 10.9 Satellite Data Communication Services 496 10.9.1 Satellite Data Broadcasting 496 10.9.2 VSATs (Very Small Aperture Terminals) 497 10.10 Important Missions 502 10.10.1 International Satellite Systems 502 10.10.2 Regional Satellite Systems 512 10.10.3 National Satellite Systems 513 10.11 Future Trends 514 10.11.1 Development of Satellite Constellations in LEO Orbits 516 10.11.2 Development of Personal Communication Services (PCS) 516 10.11.3 Use of Higher Frequency Bands 517 10.11.4 Development of Light Quantum Communication Techniques 517 10.11.5 Development of Broadband Services to Mobile Users 517 10.11.6 Development of Hybrid Satellite/Terrestrial Networks 517 10.11.7 Advanced Concepts 518 Further Readings 519 Glossary 521 11 Remote Sensing Satellites 524 11.1 Remote Sensing -- An Overview 524 11.1.1 Aerial Remote Sensing 525 11.1.2 Satellite Remote Sensing 525 11.2 Classification of Satellite Remote Sensing Systems 526 11.2.1 Optical Remote Sensing Systems 526 11.2.2 Thermal Infrared Remote Sensing Systems 528 11.2.3 Microwave Remote Sensing Systems 529 11.3 Remote Sensing Satellite Orbits 531 11.4 Remote Sensing Satellite Payloads 531 11.4.1 Classification of Sensors 531 11.4.2 Sensor Parameters 534 11.5 Passive Sensors 535 11.5.1 Passive Scanning Sensors 536 11.5.2 Passive Non-scanning Sensors 539 11.6 Active Sensors 540 11.6.1 Active Non-scanning Sensors 540 11.6.2 Active Scanning Sensors 540 11.7 Types of Images 542 11.7.1 Primary Images 542 11.7.2 Secondary Images 542 11.8 Image Classification 545 11.9 Image Interpretation 546 11.9.1 Interpreting Optical and Thermal Remote Sensing Images 546 11.9.2 Interpreting Microwave Remote Sensing Images 547 11.9.3 GIS in Remote Sensing 547 11.10 Applications of Remote Sensing Satellites 548 11.10.1 Land Cover Classification 548 11.10.2 Land Cover Change Detection 549 11.10.3 Water Quality Monitoring and Management 550 11.10.4 Flood Monitoring 551 11.10.5 Urban Monitoring and Development 552 11.10.6 Measurement of Sea Surface Temperature 552 11.10.7 Deforestation 553 11.10.8 Global Monitoring 553 11.10.9 Predicting Disasters 555 11.10.10 Other Applications 558 11.11 Major Remote Sensing Missions 558 11.11.1 Landsat Satellite System 558 11.11.2 SPOT Satellite System 561 11.11.3 Radarsat Satellite System 564 11.11.4 Indian Remote Sensing Satellite System 565 11.12 Future Trends 573 Further Readings 574 Glossary 575 12 Weather Satellites 577 12.1 Weather Forecasting -- An Overview 577 12.2 Weather Forecasting Satellite Fundamentals 580 12.3 Images from Weather Forecasting Satellites 580 12.3.1 Visible Images 580 12.3.2 IR Images 582 12.3.3 Water Vapour Images 583 12.3.4 Microwave Images 584 12.3.5 Images Formed by Active Probing 585 12.4 Weather Forecasting Satellite Orbits 586 12.5 Weather Forecasting Satellite Payloads 587 12.5.1 Radiometer 588 12.5.2 Active Payloads 589 12.6 Image Processing and Analysis 592 12.6.1 Image Enhancement Techniques 592 12.7 Weather Forecasting Satellite Applications 593 12.7.1 Measurement of Cloud Parameters 594 12.7.2 Rainfall 594 12.7.3 Wind Speed and Direction 595 12.7.4 Ground-level Temperature Measurements 596 12.7.5 Air Pollution and Haze 596 12.7.6 Fog 596 12.7.7 Oceanography 596 12.7.8 Severe Storm Support 597 12.7.9 Fisheries 598 12.7.10 Snow and Ice Studies 598 12.8 Major Weather Forecasting Satellite Missions 599 12.8.1 GOES Satellite System 599 12.8.2 Meteosat Satellite System 605 12.8.3 Advanced TIROS-N (ATN) NOAA Satellites 608 12.9 Future of Weather Forecasting Satellite Systems 612 Further Readings 612 Glossary 613 13 Navigation Satellites 614 13.1 Development of Satellite Navigation Systems 614 13.1.1 Doppler Effect based Satellite Navigation Systems 615 13.1.2 Trilateration-based Satellite Navigation Systems 615 13.2 Global Positioning System (GPS) 621 13.2.1 Space Segment 621 13.2.2 Control Segment 622 13.2.3 User Segment 623 13.3 Working Principle of the GPS 625 13.3.1 Principle of Operation 625 13.3.2 GPS Signal Structure 627 13.3.3 Pseudorange Measurements 628 13.3.4 Determination of the Receiver Location 629 13.4 GPS Positioning Services and Positioning Modes 631 13.4.1 GPS Positioning Services 631 13.4.2 GPS Positioning Modes 632 13.5 GPS Error Sources 634 13.6 GLONASS Satellite System 637 13.6.1 GLONASS Segments 638 13.6.2 GLONASS Signal Structure 639 13.7 GPS-GLONASS Integration 641 13.8 EGNOS Satellite Navigation System 642 13.9 Galileo Satellite Navigation Systems 645 13.9.1 Three-Phase Development Programme 645 13.9.2 Services 646 13.10 Indian Regional Navigational Satellite System (IRNSS) 647 13.11 Compass Satellite Navigation System 648 13.12 Hybrid Navigation Systems 648 13.13 Applications of Satellite Navigation Systems 650 13.13.1 Military Applications 650 13.13.2 Civilian Applications 651 13.14 Future of Satellite Navigation Systems 654 Further Readings 655 Glossary 656 14 Scientific Satellites 658 14.1 Satellite-based versus Ground-based Scientific Techniques 658 14.2 Payloads on Board Scientific Satellites 659 14.2.1 Payloads for Studying Earth’s Geodesy 659 14.2.2 Payloads for Earth Environment Studies 660 14.2.3 Payloads for Astronomical Studies 661 14.3 Applications of Scientific Satellites -- Study of Earth 665 14.3.1 Space Geodesy 665 14.3.2 Tectonics and Internal Geodynamics 669 14.3.3 Terrestrial Magnetic Fields 670 14.4 Observation of the Earth’s Environment 670 14.4.1 Study of the Earth’s Ionosphere and Magnetosphere 671 14.4.2 Study of the Earth’s Upper Atmosphere (Aeronomy) 677 14.4.3 Study of the Interaction between Earth and its Environment 679 14.5 Astronomical Observations 680 14.5.1 Observation of the Sun 681 14.6 Missions for Studying Planets of the Solar System 686 14.6.1 Mercury 691 14.6.2 Venus 692 14.6.3 Mars 694 14.6.4 Outer Planets 697 14.6.5 Moon 703 14.6.6 Asteroids 705 14.6.7 Comets 706 14.7 Missions Beyond the Solar System 707 14.8 Other Fields of Investigation 710 14.8.1 Microgravity Experiments 710 14.8.2 Life Sciences 711 14.8.3 Material Sciences 712 14.8.4 Cosmic Ray and Fundamental Physics Research 713 14.9 Future Trends 714 Further Readings 715 Glossary 715 15 Military Satellites 717 15.1 Military Satellites -- An Overview 717 15.1.1 Applications of Military Satellites 718 15.2 Military Communication Satellites 718 15.3 Development of Military Communication Satellite Systems 719 15.3.1 American Systems 720 15.3.2 Russian Systems 724 15.3.3 Satellites Launched by other Countries 725 15.4 Frequency Spectrum Utilized by Military Communication Satellite Systems 726 15.5 Dual-use Military Communication Satellite Systems 727 15.6 Reconnaisance Satellites 728 15.6.1 Image Intelligence or IMINT Satellites 728 15.7 SIGINT Satellites 732 15.7.1 Development of SIGINT Satellites 733 15.8 Early Warning Satellites 735 15.8.1 Major Early Warning Satellite Programmes 736 15.9 Nuclear Explosion Satellites 738 15.10 Military Weather Forecasting Satellites 738 15.11 Military Navigation Satellites 739 15.12 Space Weapons 739 15.12.1 Classification of Space Weapons 740 15.13 Strategic Defence Initiative 745 15.13.1 Ground Based Programmes 746 15.13.2 Directed Energy Weapon Programmes 749 15.13.3 Space Programmes 751 15.13.4 Sensor Programmes 752 15.14 Directed Energy Laser Weapons 752 15.14.1 Advantages 753 15.14.2 Limitations 753 15.14.3 Directed Energy Laser Weapon Components 754 15.14.4 Important Design Parametres 755 15.14.5 Important Laser Sources 756 15.14.6 Beam Control Technology 763 15.15 Advanced Concepts 764 15.15.1 New Surveillance Concepts Using Satellites 765 15.15.2 Long Reach Non-lethal Laser Dazzler 765 15.15.3 Long Reach Laser Target Designator 766 Further Readings 767 Glossary 767 16 Emerging Trends 769 16.1 Introduction 769 16.2 Space Tethers 769 16.2.1 Space Tethers -- Different Types 770 16.2.2 Applications 774 16.2.3 Space Tether Missions 775 16.2.4 Space Elevator 779 16.3 Aerostat Systems 781 16.3.1 Components of an Aerostat System 782 16.3.2 Types of Aerostat Systems 782 16.3.3 Applications 783 16.4 Millimetre Wave Satellite Communication 784 16.4.1 Millimetre Wave Band 784 16.4.2 Advantages 785 16.4.3 Propagation Considerations 787 16.4.4 Applications 788 16.4.5 Millimetre Wave Satellite Missions 789 16.5 Space Stations 793 16.5.1 Importance of Space Stations 794 16.5.2 Space Stations of the Past 794 16.5.3 Currently Operational Systems 797 16.5.4 Planned Space Stations 799 16.5.5 Emerging Space Station Concepts 801 Further Readings 803 Glossary 804 Index 807

Read more less

Book SynopsisWind energy technology has progressed enormously over the last decade. In coming years it will continue to develop in terms of power ratings, performance and installed capacity of large wind turbines worldwide, with exciting developments in offshore installations. Designed to meet the training needs of wind engineers, this introductory text puts wind energy in context, from the natural resource to the assessment of cost effectiveness and bridges the gap between theory and practice. The thorough coverage spans the scientific basics, practical implementations and the modern state of technology used in onshore and offshore wind farms for electricity generation. Key features: provides in-depth treatment of all systems associated with wind energy, including the aerodynamic and structural aspects of blade design, the flow of energy and loads through the wind turbine, the electrical components and power electronics including control systems explains the Trade Review“'Spanning the scientific basics, practical implementations and the state of modern technology, this title looks like an authoritative resource for anyone who needs to ensure their turbine knowledge is up to scratch." (Real Power, 1 April 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xiv 1 The History of Wind Energy 1 Jos Beurskens 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The First Windmills: 600–1890 2 1.2.1 Technical Development of the First Horizontal Windmills 5 1.3 Generation of Electricity using Wind Farms: Wind Turbines 1890–1930 10 1.4 The First Phase of Innovation: 1930–1960 16 1.5 The Second Phase of Innovation and Mass Production: 1960 to Today 25 1.5.1 The State-Supported Development of Large Wind Turbines 28 1.5.2 The Development of Smaller Wind Turbines 36 1.5.3 Wind Farms, Offshore and Grid Connection 38 1.5.4 International Grids 41 1.5.5 To Summarise 43 References 43 2 The International Development of Wind Energy 45 Klaus Rave 2.1 The Modern Energy Debate 45 2.2 The Reinvention of the Energy Market 48 2.3 The Importance of the Power Grid 50 2.4 The New Value-added Chain 53 2.5 International Perspectives 55 2.6 Expansion into Selected Countries 58 2.7 The Role of the EU 59 2.8 International Institutions and Organisations 61 2.8.1 Scenarios 64 2.9 Global Wind Energy Outlook 2012 – The Global View into the Future 65 2.9.1 Development of the Market in Selected Countries 65 2.10 Conclusion 71 References 71 3 Wind Resources, Site Assessment and Ecology 73 Hermann van Radecke 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Wind Resources 73 3.2.1 Global Wind Systems and Ground Roughness 73 3.2.2 Topography and Roughness Length 75 3.2.3 Roughness Classes 76 3.2.4 Contour Lines and Obstacles 79 3.2.5 Wind Resources with WAsP, WindPRO, Windfarmer 81 3.2.6 Correlating Wind Potential with Mesoscale Models and Reanalysis Data 84 3.2.7 Wind in the Wind Farm 90 3.2.8 Wind Frequency Distribution 95 3.2.9 Site Classification and Annual Energy Production 96 3.2.10 Reference Yield and Duration of Increased Subsidy 99 3.3 Acoustics 101 3.3.1 The dB(A) Unit 101 3.3.2 Sources of Noise 103 3.3.3 Propagation through the Air 105 3.3.4 Imission Site and Benchmarks 105 3.3.5 Frequency Analysis, Tone Adjustment and Impulse Adjustment 106 3.3.6 Methods of Noise Reduction 106 3.3.7 Regulations for Minimum Distances 107 3.4 Shadow 107 3.5 Turbulence 109 3.5.1 Turbulence from Surrounding Environment 110 3.5.2 Turbulence Attributed to Turbines 111 3.6 Two Comprehensive Software Tools for Planning Wind Farms 111 3.7 Technical Guidelines, Fgw Guidelines and IEC Standards 112 3.8 Environmental Influences Bundes-Immissionsschutzgesetz (Federal Imission Control Act) and Approval Process 113 3.8.1 German Imission Protection Law (BImSchG) 114 3.8.2 Approval Process 115 3.8.3 Environmental Impact Assessment (Eia) 115 3.8.4 Specific Aspects of the Process 118 3.8.5 Acceptance 121 3.8.6 Monitoring and Clarifying Plant-Specific Data 121 3.9 Example Problems 121 3.10 Solutions to the Problems 123 References 124 4 Aerodynamics and Blade Design 126 Alois Schaffarczyk 4.1 Summary 126 4.2 Horizontal Plants 126 4.2.1 General 126 4.2.2 Basic Aerodynamic Terminology 127 4.3 Integral Momentum Theory 130 4.3.1 Momentum Theory of Wind Turbines: the Betz Limiting Value 130 4.3.2 Changes in Air Density with Temperature and Altitude 132 4.3.3 Influence of the Finite Blade Number 133 4.3.4 Swirl Losses and Local Optimisation of the Blades According to Glauert 134 4.3.5 Losses Due to Profile Drag 136 4.4 Momentum Theory of the Blade Elements 137 4.4.1 The Formulation 137 4.4.2 Example of an Implementation: WT-Perf 139 4.4.3 Optimisation and Design Rules for Blades 139 4.4.4 Extension of the Blade Element Method: The Differential Formulation 140 4.4.5 Three-Dimensional Computational Fluid Dynamics (Cfd) 141 4.4.6 Summary: Horizontal Plants 142 4.5 Vertical Plants 142 4.5.1 General 142 4.5.2 Aerodynamics of H Rotors 144 4.5.3 Aeroelastics of Vertical Axis Rotors 149 4.5.4 A 50 kW Rotor as an Example 150 4.5.5 Design Rules for Small Wind Turbines According to H-Darrieus Type A 150 4.5.6 Summary: Vertical Rotors 151 4.6 Wind-Driven Vehicles with a Rotor 151 4.6.1 Introduction 151 4.6.2 On the Theory of Wind-Driven Vehicles 152 4.6.3 Numerical Example 153 4.6.4 The Kiel Design Method 153 4.6.5 Evaluation 154 4.6.6 Completed Vehicles 155 4.6.7 Summary: Wind Vehicles 156 4.7 Exercises 157 References 158 5 Rotor Blades 162 Lothar Dannenberg 5.1 Introduction 162 5.2 Loads on Rotor Blades 163 5.2.1 Types of Loads 163 5.2.2 Fundamentals of the Strength Calculations 165 5.2.3 Cross-Sectional Values of Rotor Blades 167 5.2.4 Stresses and Deformations 172 5.2.5 Section Forces in the Rotor Blade 176 5.2.6 Bending and Inclination 178 5.2.7 Results According to Beam Theory 179 5.3 Vibrations and Buckling 180 5.3.1 Vibrations 180 5.3.2 Buckling and Stability Calculations 183 5.4 Finite Element Calculations 184 5.4.1 Stress Calculations 184 5.4.2 Fem Buckling Calculations 185 5.4.3 FEM Vibration Calculations 186 5.5 Fibre-Reinforced Plastics 187 5.5.1 Introduction 187 5.5.2 Materials (Fibres, Resins, Additives, Sandwich Materials) 188 5.5.3 Laminates and Laminate Properties 192 5.6 Production of Rotor Blades 195 5.6.1 Structural Parts of the Rotor Blades 195 5.6.2 Composite Manufacturing Methods 198 5.6.3 Assembly of the Rotor Blade 199 References 200 6 The Drive Train 202 Sönke Siegfriedsen 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Blade Angle Adjustment Systems 203 6.3 Wind Direction Tracking 209 6.3.1 General 209 6.3.2 Description of the Function 209 6.3.3 Components 210 6.3.4 Variations in Wind Direction Tracking Arrangements 213 6.4 Drive Train Components 215 6.4.1 Rotor Locking and Rotor Rotating Arrangements 216 6.4.2 Rotor Shaft and Mountings 217 6.4.3 Gears 220 6.4.4 Brake and Coupling 223 6.4.5 Generator 225 6.5 Drive Train Concepts 227 6.5.1 Direct-Driven – Double Mounting 228 6.5.2 Direct-Driven – Torque Support 230 6.5.3 One–Two Step Geared Drives – Double Bearings 232 6.5.4 One–Two Step Geared Drives – Torque Support 234 6.5.5 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Double Mountings 235 6.5.6 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Three-Point Mountings 237 6.5.7 Three–Four Step Geared Drives – Torque Support 239 6.6 Damage and Causes of Damage 240 6.7 Design of Drive Train Components 241 6.7.1 LDD 244 6.7.2 RFC 244 6.8 Intellectual Property in the Wind Industry 246 6.8.1 Example Patents of Drive Trains 247 Further Reading 251 7 Tower and Foundation 253 Torsten Faber 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Guidelines and Standards 255 7.3 Tower Loading 255 7.3.1 Fatigue Loads 255 7.3.2 Extreme Loads 257 7.4 Verification of the Structure 258 7.4.1 Proof of Load Capacity 258 7.4.2 Proof of Fitness for Use 259 7.4.3 Proof of Foundation 259 7.4.4 Vibration Calculations (Eigen Frequencies) 260 7.5 Design Details 261 7.5.1 Door Openings in Steel Tube Towers 262 7.5.2 Ring Flange Connections 262 7.5.3 Welded Connections 262 7.6 Materials for Towers 263 7.6.1 Steel 263 7.6.2 Concrete 263 7.6.3 Timber 264 7.6.4 Glass Fibre-Reinforced Plastic 265 7.7 Model Types 265 7.7.1 Tubular Towers 265 7.7.2 Lattice Masts 266 7.7.3 Guyed Towers 266 7.8 Foundations for Onshore WTs 267 7.8.1 Force of Gravity 267 7.8.2 Piles 267 7.8.3 Cables 267 7.9 Exercises 268 7.10 Solutions 269 References 272 8 Power Electronics and Generator Systems for Wind Turbines 273 Friedrich W. Fuchs 8.1 Introduction 273 8.2 Single-Phase AC Voltage and Three-Phase AC Voltage Systems 275 8.3 Transformer 278 8.3.1 Principle and Calculations 278 8.3.2 Equivalent Circuit Diagram, Phasor Diagram 279 8.3.3 Simplified Equivalent Circuit Diagram 281 8.3.4 Three-Phase Transformers 282 8.4 Generators for Wind Turbines 283 8.4.1 Induction Machine with Short-Circuit Rotor 284 8.4.2 Induction Machine with Slip Ring Rotor 295 8.5 Synchronous Machines 303 8.5.1 General Function 303 8.5.2 Voltage Equations and Equivalent Circuit Diagram 304 8.5.3 Power and Torque 306 8.5.4 Models of Externally Excited Synchronous Machines 307 8.5.5 Permanently Excited Synchronous Machines 308 8.5.6 Variable Speed Operation of Synchronous Machines 309 8.6 Converter Systems for Wind Turbines 310 8.6.1 General Function 310 8.6.2 Frequency Converter in Two-Level Topology 311 8.6.3 Frequency Converter with Multi-Level Circuits 317 8.7 Control of Variable-Speed Converter-Generator Systems 318 8.7.1 Control of the Converter-Fed Induction Generator with Short-Circuit Rotor 319 8.7.2 Control of the Doubly-Fed Induction Machine 325 8.7.3 Control of the Synchronous Machine 326 8.7.4 Control of the Grid-Side Converter 326 8.7.5 Design of the Controls 329 8.8 Compliance with the Grid Connection Requirements 329 8.9 Further Electronic Components 331 8.10 Features of the Power Electronics Generator System in Overview 332 8.11 Exercises 333 References 338 9 Control of Wind Energy Systems 340 Reiner Johannes Schütt 9.1 Fundamental Relationships 341 9.1.1 Allocation of the WTS Automation 341 9.1.2 System Properties of Energy Conversion in WTs 344 9.1.3 Energy Transformation at the Rotor 344 9.1.4 Energy Transformation at the Drive Train 347 9.1.5 Energy Conversion at the Generator-Converter System 348 9.1.6 Idealised Operating Characteristic Curves of WTs 351 9.2 WT Control Systems 352 9.2.1 Yaw Angle Control 352 9.2.2 Blade Angle Control 353 9.2.3 Active Power Control 354 9.2.4 Reactive Power Control 357 9.2.5 Summary of the Control Behaviour and Extended Operating Ranges of the WT 358 9.3 Operating Management Systems for WTs 358 9.3.1 Control of the Operating Sequence of WTs 359 9.3.2 Safety Systems 362 9.4 Wind Farm Control and Automation Systems 363 9.5 Remote Control and Monitoring 365 9.6 Communication Systems for WTS 366 References 368 10 Grid Integration 369 Sven Wanser and Frank Ehlers 10.1 Energy Supply Grids in Overview 369 10.1.1 General 369 10.1.2 Voltage Level of Electrical Supply Grids 370 10.1.3 Grid Structures 370 10.2 Grid Control 372 10.2.1 Controlling the Power Range 373 10.2.2 Compensating Power and Balancing Grids 373 10.2.3 Base Load, Medium Load and Peak Load 374 10.2.4 Frequency Stability 375 10.2.5 Primary Control, Secondary Control and Tertiary Control 376 10.2.6 Voltage Stability 378 10.2.7 System Services by means of Wind Turbines 378 10.3 Basic Terminology of Grid Integration of Wind Turbines 380 10.3.1 Basic Electrical Terminology 380 10.3.2 Grid Quality 384 10.4 Grid Connections for WTs 387 10.4.1 Rating the Grid Operating Media 388 10.4.2 Checking the Voltage Changes/Voltage Band 390 10.4.3 Checking the Grid Reaction ‘Fast Voltage Change’ 395 10.4.4 Checking the Short-Circuit Strength 396 10.5 Grid Connection of WTs 397 10.5.1 Switchgear 398 10.5.2 Protective Equipment 399 10.5.3 Integration into the Grid System 401 10.6 Further Developments in Grid Integration and Outlook 401 10.6.1 Grid Expansion 402 10.6.2 Load Displacement 404 10.6.3 Energy Storage 404 References 405 11 Offshore Wind Energy 406 Lothar Dannenberg 11.1 Offshore Wind Turbines 406 11.1.1 Introduction 406 11.1.2 Differences between Offshore and Onshore WTs 407 11.1.3 Environmental Conditions and Nature Protection 409 11.2 Currents and Loads 409 11.2.1 Currents 409 11.2.2 Current Loads 410 11.2.3 Vortex Shedding of Bodies Subject to Flows 412 11.3 Waves, Wave Loads 413 11.3.1 Wave Theories 413 11.3.2 Superposition of Waves and Currents 423 11.3.3 Loads Due to Waves (Morison Method) 425 11.4 Swell 430 11.4.1 Regular Swell 430 11.4.2 Irregular or Natural Swells 430 11.4.3 Statistics 431 11.4.4 Swell Spectra 432 11.4.5 Influence of Currents 436 11.4.6 Long-Term Statistics of the Swell 436 11.4.7 Extreme Waves 436 11.5 Scouring Formation, Growth, Corrosion and Ice 437 11.5.1 Scouring 437 11.5.2 Marine Growth 438 11.5.3 Ice Loads 439 11.5.4 Corrosion 439 11.6 Foundations for OWTs 441 11.6.1 Introduction 441 11.6.2 Fixed Foundations 442 11.6.3 Floating Foundations 447 11.6.4 Operating Strength 448 11.7 Soil Mechanics 450 11.7.1 Introduction 450 11.7.2 Soil Properties 450 11.7.3 Calculation of Load-Bearing Behaviour of the Sea Bed 451 References 454 Index 455

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystem Simulation Techniques with MATLAB and Simulink comprehensively explains how to use MATLAB and Simulink to perform dynamic systems simulation tasks for engineering and non-engineering applications.Table of ContentsForeword xiiiPreface xv1 Introduction to System Simulation Techniques and Applications 11.1 Overview of System Simulation Techniques 11.2 Development of Simulation Software 21.3 Introduction to MATLAB 51.4 Structure of the Book 7Exercises 9References 92 Fundamentals of MATLAB Programming 112.1 MATLAB Environment 112.2 Data Types in MATLAB 132.3 Matrix Computations in MATLAB 162.5 Programming and Tactics of MATLAB Functions 232.6 Two-dimensional Graphics in MATLAB 272.7 Three-dimensional Graphics 332.8 Graphical User Interface Design in MATLAB 362.9 Accelerating MATLAB Functions 52Exercises 60References 633 MATLAB Applications in Scientific Computations 653.1 Analytical and Numerical Solutions 663.2 Solutions to Linear Algebra Problems 673.3 Solutions of Calculus Problems 853.4 Solutions of Ordinary Differential Equations 913.5 Nonlinear Equation Solutions and Optimization 1103.6 Dynamic Programming and its Applications in Path Planning 1203.7 Data Interpolation and Statistical Analysis 124Exercises 136References 1424 Mathematical Modeling and Simulation with Simulink 1454.1 Brief Description of the Simulink Block Library 1464.2 Simulink Modeling 1594.3 Model Manipulation and Simulation Analysis 1644.4 Illustrative Examples of Simulink Modeling 1724.5 Modeling, Simulation and Analysis of Linear Systems 1804.6 Simulation of Continuous Nonlinear Stochastic Systems 184Exercises 188References 1915 Commonly Used Blocks and Intermediate-level Modeling Skills 1935.1 Commonly Used Blocks and Modeling Skills 1935.2 Modeling and Simulation of Multivariable Linear Systems 2025.3 Nonlinear Components with Lookup Table Blocks 2095.4 Block Diagram Based Solutions of Differential Equations 2175.5 Output Block Library 2265.6 Three-dimensional Animation of Simulation Results 2385.7 Subsystems and Block Masking Techniques 245Exercises 260References 2646 Advanced Techniques in Simulink Modeling and Applications 2656.1 Command-line Modeling in Simulink 2656.2 System Simulation and Linearization 2726.3 S-function Programming and Applications 2806.4 Examples of Optimization in Simulation: Optimal Controller Design Applications 296Exercises 303References 3067 Modeling and Simulation of Engineering Systems 3077.1 Physical System Modeling with Simscape 3087.2 Description of SimPowerSystems 3187.3 Modeling and Simulation of Electronic Systems 3227.4 Simulation of Motors and Electric Drive Systems 3367.5 Modeling and Simulation of Mechanical Systems 346Exercises 360References 3628 Modeling and Simulation of Non-Engineering Systems 3638.1 Modeling and Simulation of Pharmacokinetics Systems 3638.2 Video and Image Processing Systems 3768.3 Finite State Machine Simulation and Stateflow Applications 3908.4 Simulation of Discrete Event Systems with SimEvents 408Exercises 416References 4179 Hardware-in-the-loop Simulation and Real-time Control 4199.1 Simulink and Real-Time Workshop 4199.2 Introduction to dSPACE and its Blocks 4299.3 Introduction to Quanser and its Blocks 4309.4 Hardware-in-the-loop Simulation and Real-time Control Examples 4339.5 Low Cost Solutions with NIAT 4399.6 HIL Solutions with Even Lower Costs 4469.6.3 The MESABox 449Exercises 450References 451Appendix: Functions and Models 453Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive, practical book on software management that dispels real-world issues through relevant case studies Software managers inevitably will meet obstacles while trying to deliver quality products and provide value to customers, often with tight time restrictions. The result: Software War Stories. This book provides readers with practical advice on how to handle the many issues that can arise as a software project unfolds. It utilizes case studies that focus on what can be done to establish and meet reasonable expectations as they occur in government, industrial, and academic settings. The book also offers important discussions on both traditional and agile methods as well as lean development concepts. Software War Stories: Covers the basics of management as applied to situations ranging from agile projects to large IT projects with infrastructure problems Includes coverage of topics ranging from planning, estiTable of ContentsFOREWORD by Roger S. Pressman xiii PREFACE xv CHAPTER 1 GETTING STARTED 1 Goals and Scope 1 Understanding the Enterprise 2 Review of Software Management Fundamentals 3 Theory versus Practice: Which Is It? 6 Emphasizing Practitioner Roles 7 Setting Realistic Expectations 8 How Do You Know Whether You Will Be Successful? 13 Recognizing Bad Smells and Trusting Your Blink 13 Separating the Controllables from the Noncontrollables 14 Surveying the Tools of the Trade 15 Line Management Tools and Techniques 16 Project Management Tools and Techniques 17 Digging Deep to Find the Root Cause 18 Questions to Be Answered 18 Summary of Key Points 19 References 20 Web Pointers 20 CHAPTER 2 INDUSTRIAL CASE: ORGANIZING FOR ERP WITHIN A LARGE INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SHOP 23 Learning Objectives: Putting Project Management to Work 23 Setting the Stage: The Three-Headed Dragon 23 Options, Recommendation, and Reactions during the Transition to ERP 26 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When Introducing Matrix Management 32 Exercise: If You Were King, What Organizational Changes Would You Make to Breakdown the Silos? 33 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 35 References 35 Web Pointers 36 CHAPTER 3 INDUSTRIAL CASE: WHAT IS A REASONABLE COST AND SCHEDULE FOR A TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROJECT UPGRADE? 37 Learning Objectives: Establishing Realistic Cost and Schedule Goals 37 Setting the Stage: Can We Do It for the Target Cost? 37 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Striving to Satisfy Key Clients 41 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Using Incremental Development 49 Exercise: How Do You Get Your Bosses to Believe Your Estimates? 50 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 51 References 52 Web Pointers 52 CHAPTER 4 INDUSTRIAL CASE: GETTING BACK ON TRACK WITHIN A MANUFACTURING ENVIRONMENT 55 Learning Objectives: Getting Back on Track 55 Setting the Stage: Recognizing and Addressing the Trouble Signs 55 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Attempting to Restore Order 57 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Associated with Your Get-Well Plan 63 Exercise: When Trying to Get a Software Project Back on Track, What Do You Focus On? 64 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 69 References 69 Web Pointers 70 CHAPTER 5 INDUSTRIAL CASE: STAFF TURNOVER HAVING AN IMPACT IN FINANCIAL FIRM 73 Learning Objectives: Addressing Staffi ng Issues 73 Setting the Stage: Understanding the Learning Curve 73 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions While Building a Modern Test Organization 76 Outcomes and Lessons Learned While Addressing Test Issues 81 Exercise: What Nonfinancial Incentives Would You Use to Reduce Staff Turnover? 82 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 83 References 84 Web Pointers 85 CHAPTER 6 INDUSTRIAL CASE: ACQUIRING SOFTWARE FOR PIPELINE OPERATIONS 87 Learning Objectives: Developing Requirements Using Multidisciplinary Teams 87 Setting the Stage: How to Avoid Gold Plating and Other Common Maladies 87 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions When Specifying Requirements 89 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Relative to the Use of Feature-Based Specifications 97 Exercise: When Managing Requirements, What Are the Traps to Watch Out For? 97 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 99 References 100 Web Pointers 100 CHAPTER 7 INDUSTRIAL CASE: LAUNCHING SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS SALES ON THE INTERNET AND SOCIAL MEDIA 102 Learning Objectives: How Do You Transition a Start-Up from R&D to Doing Business? 102 Setting the Stage: Capitalizing on the Opportunities 102 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions as You Get Ready for Your Product Launch 104 Outcomes and Lessons Learned as Your Product Hits the Street 111 Exercise: How Do You Satisfy Business and Customer Needs When Selling Software? 112 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 114 References 115 Web Pointers 115 CHAPTER 8 GOVERNMENT CASE: MANAGING THE ACQUISITION OF A LARGE DEFENSE PROJECT 117 Learning Objectives: What to Do When a Contractor Is behind Schedule, over Budget, and Performing Badly 117 Setting the Stage: Who Do We Blame? 117 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Resulting from an Independent Assessment 121 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When the Truth Is Exposed 126 Exercise: When Addressing Software Cost and Schedule Problems, How Do You Determine Their Root Causes? 127 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 129 References 129 Web Pointers 130 CHAPTER 9 GOVERNMENT CASE: TOO MUCH GOVERNANCE/OVERSIGHT HINDERS PROGRESS IN HEALTH CARE 132 Learning Objectives: How to Handle Extreme Governance Requirements Under Pressure 132 Setting the Stage: Governance and the Competitive Environment 132 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Aimed at Validating the Architecture of a New Pharmacy System 136 Outcomes and Lessons Learned When Dealing with Customer Demands for Change 139 Exercise: How Much Oversight Is Enough within a Constrained but Competitive Contractual Environment? 141 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 143 References 144 Web Pointers 144 CHAPTER 10 GOVERNMENT CASE: NEW CONCEPTS FOR AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL 147 Learning Objectives: Making the Transition to Agile Methods 147 Setting the Stage: Change Management within Conservative Organizations 147 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions during the Transition to Agile Methods on a Large Project Being Developed Globally 149 Outcomes and Lessons Learned as You Scale Agile Methods for Use 154 Exercise: How Do You Mechanize the Agile Notion That Software Requirements Are a Learning Exercise Rather Than a Specification Process? 155 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 158 References 159 Web Pointers 160 CHAPTER 11 GOVERNMENT CASE: ADDRESSING CYBER CRIME ON THE INTERNET 163 Learning Objectives: How to Get Help in Covering Unbudgeted Tasks 163 Setting the Stage: The Quick Update Cycle 163 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions to Approaches to Handle Frequent Requests to Refresh Network Defenses 165 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Related to Getting Budget Relief 170 Exercise: How Do You Quickly Change a Software Product and Keep Customers Happy at the Same Time? 171 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 175 References 175 Web Pointers 176 CHAPTER 12 ACADEMIC CASE: HOW BEST TO EDUCATE THOSE ENTERING INDUSTRY 178 Learning Objectives: Getting New University Hires Up-to-Speed Quickly 178 Setting the Stage: What Does Industry Need from Universities? 178 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions When Recruiting at Universities 182 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Based on Recruiting Results 184 Exercise: What Education and Training Do You Provide for New Software Hires? 186 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 189 References 190 Web Pointers 190 CHAPTER 13 ACADEMIC CASE: RESEARCH AGENDAS THAT MATTER TO INDUSTRY 191 Learning Objectives: Sponsored Research Agendas 191 Setting the Stage: Research versus Teaching: A Dilemma? 191 Fact-Finding 193 Options, Recommendations, and Reactions Based on Research Discussions 193 Organization 194 Project 194 Process 195 Product 196 Recommendations 196 Outcomes and Lessons Learned Based on University Performance 197 Exercise: How Do You Stimulate Pursuit of Software Research in Academia That Has a Near Rather Than Far-Term Impact? 199 Summary of Key Points and Lessons Learned 201 References 202 Web Pointers 202 CHAPTER 14 PULLING IT ALL TOGETHER 205 Software Management Secrets of Success 205 Gaining Insight and Advantage in Practice 206 Ten Management Techniques to Rely On 207 Ten Problems to Be Wary of When Pursuing Success 211 Things You Can and Cannot Do in General 212 If I Were King: My Six Wishes 213 Summary 214 References 214 Web Pointers 215 APPENDIX A ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY OF KEY TERMS 217 Acronyms Used within the Book 217 Key Terms Used within the Book 221 APPENDIX B RECOMMENDED READINGS, REFERENCES, AND RESOURCES 227 Recommended Readings 227 References 228 Other Resources 229 APPENDIX C SAMPLE SOLUTIONS 231 Chapter 2: Industrial Case: Organizing for ERP within a Large Information Technology Shop 231 Chapter 3: Industrial Case: What Is a Reasonable Cost and Schedule for a Telecommunications Project Upgrade? 233 Chapter 4: Industrial Case: Getting a Project Back on Track within a Manufacturing Environment 236 Chapter 5: Industrial Case: Staff Turnover Having an Impact in Financial Firm 240 Chapter 6: Industrial Case: Acquiring Software for Pipeline Operations 243 Chapter 7: Industrial Case: Launching Software Applications Sales on the Internet and Social Media 245 Chapter 8: Government Case: Managing the Acquisition of a Large Defense Project 248 Chapter 9: Government Case: Too Much Governance/Oversight Hinders Progress in Health Care 251 Chapter 10: Government Case: New Concepts for Air Traffi c Control 253 Chapter 11: Government Case: Addressing Cyber Crime on the Internet 256 Chapter 12: Academic Case: How Best to Educate Those Entering Industry 258 Chapter 13: Academic Case: Research Agendas That Matter to Industry 260 INDEX 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisA fully comprehensive introduction to smart grid standards and their applications for developers, consumers and service providers The critical role of standards for smart grid has already been realized by world-wide governments and industrial organizations. There are hundreds of standards for Smart Grid which have been developed in parallel by different organizations. It is therefore necessary to arrange those standards in such a way that it is easier for readers to easily understand and select a particular standard according to their requirements without going into the depth of each standard, which often spans from hundreds to thousands of pages. The book will allow people in the smart grid areas and in the related industries to easily understand the fundamental standards of smart grid, and quickly find the building-block standards they need from hundreds of standards for implementing a smart grid system. The authors highlight the most advanced works andTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii 1 An Overview of the Smart Grid 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Overview of Smart Grid-Related Organizations 3 1.2.1 SDOs Dealing with the Smart Grid 4 1.2.2 Technical Consortia, Forums, and Panels Dealing with the Smart Grid 9 1.2.3 Other Political, Market, and Trade Organizations, Forums, and Alliances 12 1.3 Status of the United States (US) 15 1.3.1 Strategy Development and Planning 15 1.3.2 Policy and Law Enforcement 18 1.3.3 Government and Company Pilot Projects 19 1.4 Status of the European Union (EU) 20 1.4.1 Activities of the European Union 20 1.4.2 Activities of EU Member Countries 22 1.5 Status of Japan 25 1.6 Status of South Korea 27 1.7 Status of China 28 1.8 Conclusions 30 References 30 2 Renewable Energy Generation 35 2.1 Introduction 35 2.2 Renewable Energy Systems and the Smart Grid 37 2.2.1 Hydroelectric Power 37 2.2.2 Solar Energy 40 2.2.3 Wind Energy 51 2.2.4 Fuel Cell 56 2.2.5 Geothermal Energy 60 2.2.6 Biomass 64 2.3 Challenges of Renewable Energy Systems 73 2.3.1 High Capital Cost 73 2.3.2 Integrating Renewable to the On-Grid 74 2.3.3 Reliable Supply of Power 74 2.3.4 Power Transmission 74 2.3.5 Power Distribution 74 2.4 Conclusion 75 References 75 3 Power Grid 79 3.1 Power Grid Systems 80 3.2 An Overview of the Important Key Standards for the Power Grid 81 3.3 Communications in the Smart Grid 82 3.3.1 Communications for Substations: IEC 61850 Standards 82 3.3.2 Communications for Telecontrol: IEC 60870-5 Standards 88 3.3.3 Inter-Control Center Communications: IEC 60870-6 Standards 93 3.4 Energy Management Systems 97 3.4.1 Application Program Interface: the IEC 61970 Standards 97 3.4.2 Software Inter-Application Integration: the IEC 61968 Standards 102 3.5 Teleprotection Equipment 106 3.5.1 An Overview of the IEC 60834 106 3.5.2 Types of Teleprotection Command Schemes 107 3.5.3 Requirements for Command Type Teleprotection Systems 108 3.5.4 Teleprotection System Performance Requirements 108 3.5.5 Teleprotection System Performance Tests 110 3.6 Application Cases of Related Standards in the Power Grid 111 3.6.1 Case 1: Engineering Process in Smart Substation Automation 111 3.6.2 Case 2: Information Exchange Services and Service Tracking 117 3.7 Analysis of Relationships among Related Standards 125 3.7.1 IEC 61970 and IEC 61968 125 3.7.2 IEC 61850 and IEC 61970 126 3.7.3 IEC 61850 and IEC 60870 126 3.7.4 TASE.2 and MMS 127 3.7.5 Latest Progresses of Related Standards 128 3.8 Conclusion 129 Appendix 3.A A SED File Example (Extensible Markup Language) 129 References 140 4 Smart Storage and Electric Vehicles 145 4.1 Introduction 145 4.2 Electric Storage 146 4.2.1 An Overview of Electric Storage 146 4.2.2 Electric Storage Technologies and Applications 147 4.2.3 Standardization Projects and Efforts 151 4.3 Distributed Energy Resources 154 4.3.1 An Overview of Distributed Energy Resources 154 4.3.2 Technologies and Applications 155 4.3.3 Various Standardization Processes and Projects 158 4.4 E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 160 4.4.1 Introduction of E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 160 4.4.2 The Rise and Fall of Electric Vehicles 161 4.4.3 Types of Electric Vehicles 162 4.4.4 Electric Vehicle Batteries 164 4.4.5 Grid to Vehicle (G2V) and Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Opportunities and Challenges 166 4.4.6 Standardization of E-Mobility/Electric Vehicles 170 4.5 Conclusion 178 References 180 5 Smart Energy Consumption 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Demand Response 184 5.2.1 An Overview of Demand Response Technologies 184 5.2.2 Demand Response Technology and Barriers 185 5.2.3 Standardization Efforts Related to Demand Response 186 5.3 Advanced Metering Infrastructure Standards 188 5.3.1 The AMI System 189 5.3.2 The IEC 62056 and ANSI C12 Standards 189 5.3.3 Metering Standardization Projects and Efforts 194 5.4 Smart Home and Building Automation Standards 197 5.4.1 ISO/IEC Information Technology – Home Electronic System (HES) 198 5.4.2 ZigBee/HomePlug Smart Energy Profile 2.0 207 5.4.3 OpenHAN 2.0 217 5.4.4 Z-Wave 221 5.4.5 ECHONET 224 5.4.6 ZigBee Home Automation Public Application Profile 228 5.4.7 BACnet 231 5.4.8 LONWORKS 233 5.4.9 INSTEON 235 5.4.10 KNX 235 5.4.11 ONE-NET 238 5.4.12 A Comparison of Smart Home and Building Automation Standards 239 5.5 Conclusion 242 References 242 6 Communications in the Smart Grid 247 6.1 Introduction 247 6.1.1 Communication Requirements for the Smart Grid 248 6.1.2 List of Standards 250 6.2 Architecture of the Communication System in the Smart Grid 256 6.2.1 IP in the Smart Grid 257 6.3 Wired Communication 259 6.3.1 Power Line Communication 259 6.3.2 Optical Communication 264 6.3.3 Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) and Ethernet 266 6.4 Wireless Communication 268 6.4.1 Introduction 268 6.4.2 Wireless Very Short Distance Communication 270 6.4.3 Wireless Personal and Local Area Networks and Related Technologies in the Unlicensed Spectrum 275 6.4.4 Cellular Networks in the Licensed Spectrum and WiMAX Technology 285 6.4.5 Satellite Communication 291 6.5 Conclusion 292 References 294 7 Security and Safety for Standardized Smart Grid Networks 299 7.1 Introduction 299 7.2 Threats and Vulnerabilities of Smart Grids 300 7.2.1 Network Vulnerabilities 300 7.2.2 Errors of Communications 301 7.3 Communication Network Standards of Smart Grids 302 7.3.1 Wireless Network Standards 302 7.3.2 Wired Network Standards and Their Safety Extensions 302 7.4 Wireless Network Security Mechanisms in the Smart Grids 303 7.4.1 An Overview of Security Mechanisms in the Wireless Standardized Smart Grid 303 7.4.2 Device Joining 303 7.4.3 Securing Normal Traffic 307 7.5 Wired Network Security/Safety Mechanisms in the Smart Grid 309 7.5.1 An Overview of Security Technologies in the Wired Smart Grid 310 7.5.2 Basic Security Mechanisms of Communication Infrastructure 311 7.5.3 Principles of Safety Extensions 312 7.5.4 Security Measures of Safety Extension 313 7.6 Typical Standards of Functional Security and Safety 316 7.6.1 IEC 62351 Standards 316 7.6.2 IEC 61508 Standards 319 7.7 Discussion 321 7.7.1 Safety versus Security 321 7.7.2 Security Level 321 7.7.3 Safety Level 322 7.7.4 Open Issues 322 7.8 Conclusion 324 References 325 8 Interoperability 329 8.1 Introduction 329 8.1.1 Interoperability and Interchangeability 330 8.1.2 The Challenges of Network Interoperability 330 8.1.3 Adding Application Interoperability 331 8.2 Interoperability Standards 332 8.3 NIST Identified List of Standards to Be Reviewed 333 8.4 NIST Interoperability 339 8.5 Conceptual Reference Model for the Smart Grid 339 8.6 Different Priority Areas Identified for Standardization 340 8.6.1 Wide-Area Situational Awareness 341 8.6.2 Demand Response and Consumer Energy Efficiency 341 8.6.3 Smart Energy Storage 342 8.6.4 Electric Transportation 342 8.6.5 Cybersecurity 342 8.6.6 Network Communications 343 8.6.7 Advanced Metering Infrastructure 344 8.6.8 Distribution Grid Management 344 8.7 Priority Action Plans 344 8.8 Different Layers of Interoperability 346 8.9 Conclusion 347 References 348 9 Integration of Variable Renewable Resources 351 9.1 Introduction 351 9.2 Challenges of Grid Integration of Intermittent Renewable Systems 352 9.2.1 Operation of a Conventional Electric Power System 352 9.2.2 Impact of Adding Intermittent Renewable Systems to the Power Grid 354 9.3 Transitioning to Highly Renewable Electricity Grid 357 9.3.1 Planning Studies 357 9.4 Very High Penetration and Grid-Scale Storage 363 9.4.1 Grid-Matching Analysis – Case of the Israeli Grid 363 9.4.2 Storage Design and Dispatch – Case of Interconnected Grid 366 9.5 List of Standards Related to Integration of Renewable Resources 374 9.6 Conclusion and Recommendations 375 References 375 10 Future of the Smart Grid 379 10.1 The Premise of the Smart Grid 379 10.2 What the Smart Grid Should Deliver? 380 10.2.1 Clean Electricity 381 10.2.2 System Flexibility 381 10.2.3 Affordable Service 383 10.2.4 Reliable and Sustainable Electricity Grid 387 10.3 Challenges of the Smart Grid 387 10.3.1 Designing for a Broader Purpose 387 10.3.2 Operational Challenges 389 10.3.3 Policy Challenges 390 10.4 Future Directions 391 10.5 Conclusion 392 References 392 List of Standards for the Smart Grid 395 Index 459

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn advanced level examination of the latest developments in power transformer protection This book addresses the technical challenges of transformer malfunction analysis as well as protection. One of the current research directions is the malfunction mechanism analysis due to nonlinearity of transformer core and comprehensive countermeasures on improving the performance of transformer differential protection. Here, the authors summarize their research outcomes and present a set of recent research advances in the electromagnetic transient analysis, the application on power transformer protections, and present a more systematic investigation and review in this field. This research area is still progressing, especially with the fast development of Smart Grid. This book is an important addition to the literature and will enhance significant advancement in research. It is a good reference book for researchers in power transformer protection research and a good text book for graduaTable of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi 1 Principles of Transformer Differential Protection and Existing Problem Analysis 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Fundamentals of Transformer Differential Protection 2 1.2.1 Transformer Faults 2 1.2.2 Differential Protection of Transformers 3 1.2.3 The Unbalanced Current and Measures to Eliminate Its Effect 5 1.3 Some Problems with Power Transformer Main Protection 7 1.3.1 Other Types of Power Transformer Differential Protections 7 1.3.2 Research on Novel Protection Principles 9 1.4 Analysis of Electromagnetic Transients and Adaptability of Second Harmonic Restraint Based Differential Protection of a UHV Power Transformer 17 1.4.1 Modelling of the UHV Power Transformer 18 1.4.2 Simulation and Analysis 20 1.5 Study on Comparisons among Some Waveform Symmetry Principle Based Transformer Differential Protection 27 1.5.1 The Comparison and Analysis of Several Kinds of Symmetrical Waveform Theories 27 1.5.2 The Theory of Waveform Symmetry of Derivatives of Current and Its Analysis 28 1.5.3 Principle and Analysis of the Waveform Correlation Method 32 1.5.4 Analysis of Reliability and Sensitivity of Several Criteria 33 1.6 Summary 36 References 36 2 Malfunction Mechanism Analysis due to Nonlinearity of Transformer Core 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 The Ultra-Saturation Phenomenon of Loaded Transformer Energizing and its Impacts on Differential Protection 43 2.2.1 Loaded Transformer Energizing Model Based on Second Order Equivalent Circuit 43 2.2.2 Preliminary Simulation Studies 48 2.3 Studies on the Unusual Mal-Operation of Transformer Differential Protection during the Nonlinear Load Switch-In 57 2.3.1 Simulation Model of the Nonlinear Load Switch-In 57 2.3.2 Simulation Results and Analysis of Mal-Operation Mechanism of Differential Protection 62 2.4 Analysis of a Sort of Unusual Mal-operation of Transformer Differential Protection due to Removal of External Fault 70 2.4.1 Modelling of the External Fault Inception and Removal and Current Transformer 70 2.4.2 Analysis of Low Current Mal-operation of Differential Protection 72 2.5 Analysis and Countermeasure of Abnormal Operation Behaviours of the Differential Protection of the Converter Transformer 80 2.5.1 Recurrence and Analysis of the Reported Abnormal Operation of the Differential Protection of the Converter Transformer 80 2.5.2 Time-Difference Criterion to Discriminate between Faults and Magnetizing Inrushes of the Converter Transformer 86 2.6 Summary 95 References 95 3 Novel Analysis Tools on Operating Characteristics of Transformer Differential Protection 97 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Studies on the Operation Behaviour of Differential Protection during a Loaded Transformer Energizing 99 3.2.1 Simulation Models of Loaded Transformer Switch-On and CT 99 3.2.2 Analysis of the Mal-operation Mechanism of Differential Protection 102 3.3 Comparative Investigation on Current Differential Criteria between One Using Phase Current and One Using Phase–Phase Current Difference for the Transformer using Y-Delta Connection 1093.3.1 Analyses of Applying the Phase Current Differential to the Power Transformer with Y/Δ Connection and its Existing Bases 109 3.3.2 Rationality Analyses of Applying the Phase Current Differential Criterion to the Power Transformer with Y/Δ Connection 113 3.4 Comparative Analysis on Current Percentage Differential Protections Using a Novel Reliability Evaluation Criterion 117 3.4.1 Introduction to CPD and NPD 117 3.4.2 Performance Comparison between CPD and NPD in the Case of CT Saturation 118 3.4.3 Performance Comparison between CPD and NPD in the Case of Internal Fault 121 3.5 Comparative Studies on Percentage Differential Criteria Using Phase Current and Superimposed Phase Current 123 3.5.1 The Dynamic Locus of p - 1p +1 in the Case of CT Saturation 123 3.5.2 Sensitivity Comparison between the Phase Current Based and the Superimposed Current Based Differential Criteria 126 3.5.3 Security Comparison between the Phase Current Based and the Superimposed Current Based Differential Criteria 128 3.5.4 Simulation Analyses 130 3.6 A Novel Analysis Methodology of Differential Protection Operation Behaviour 132 3.6.1 The Relationship between Transforming Rate and the Angular Change Rate under CT Saturation 132 3.6.2 Principles of Novel Percentage Restraint Criteria 133 3.6.3 Analysis of Novel Percentage Differential Criteria 142 3.7 Summary 151 References 151 4 Novel Magnetizing Inrush Identification Schemes 153 4.1 Introduction 153 4.2 Studies for Identification of the Inrush Based on Improved Correlation Algorithm 155 4.2.1 Basic Principle of Waveform Correlation Scheme 155 4.2.2 Design and Test of the Improved Waveform Correlation Principle 159 4.3 A Novel Method for Discrimination of Internal Faults and Inrush Currents by Using Waveform Singularity Factor 163 4.3.1 Waveform Singularity Factor Based Algorithm 163 4.3.2 Testing Results and Analysis 164 4.4 A New Principle of Discrimination between Inrush Current and Internal Fault Current of Transformer Based on Self-Correlation Function 169 4.4.1 Basic Principle of Correlation Function Applied to Random Single Analysis 169 4.4.2 Theory and Analysis of Waveform Similarity Based on Self-Correlation Function 170 4.4.3 EPDL Testing Results and Analysis 173 4.5 Identifying Inrush Current Using Sinusoidal Proximity Factor 174 4.5.1 Sinusoidal Proximity Factor Based Algorithm 174 4.5.2 Testing Results and Analysis 176 4.6 A Wavelet Transform Based Scheme for Power Transformer Inrush Identification 181 4.6.1 Principle of Wavelet Transform 181 4.6.2 Inrush Identification with WPT 185 4.6.3 Results and Analysis 185 4.7 A Novel Adaptive Scheme of Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents of Transformer Using Mathematical Morphology 190 4.7.1 Mathematical Morphology 190 4.7.2 Principle and Scheme Design 193 4.7.3 Testing Results and Analysis 194 4.8 Identifying Transformer Inrush Current Based on Normalized Grille Curve 202 4.8.1 Normalized Grille Curve 202 4.8.2 Experimental System 205 4.8.3 Testing Results and Analysis 207 4.9 A Novel Algorithm for Discrimination between Inrush Currents and Internal Faults Based on Equivalent Instantaneous Leakage Inductance 211 4.9.1 Basic Principle 211 4.9.2 EILI-Based Criterion 217 4.9.3 Experimental Results and Analysis 218 4.10 A Two-Terminal Network-Based Method for Discrimination between Internal Faults and Inrush Currents 222 4.10.1 Basic Principle 222 4.10.2 Experimental System 230 4.10.3 Testing Results and Analysis 230 4.11 Summary 234 References 234 5 Comprehensive Countermeasures for Improving the Performance of Transformer Differential Protection 237 5.1 Introduction 237 5.2 A Method to Eliminate the Magnetizing Inrush Current of Energized Transformers 242 5.2.1 Principles and Modelling of the Inrush Suppressor and Parameter Design 242 5.2.2 Simulation Validation and Results Analysis 249 5.3 Identification of the Cross-Country Fault of a Power Transformer for Fast Unblocking of Differential Protection 255 5.3.1 Criterion for Identifying Cross-Country Faults Using the Variation of the Saturated Secondary Current with Respect to the Differential Current 255 5.3.2 Simulation Analyses and Test Verification 257 5.4 Adaptive Scheme in the Transformer Main Protection 268 5.4.1 The Fundamental of the Time Difference Based Method to Discriminate between the Fault Current and the Inrush of the Transformer 268 5.4.2 Preset Filter 269 5.4.3 Comprehensive Protection Scheme 271 5.4.4 Simulation Tests and Analysis 274 5.5 A Series Multiresolution Morphological Gradient Based Criterion to Identify CT Saturation 294 5.5.1 Time Difference Extraction Criterion Using Mathematical Morphology 294 5.5.2 Simulation Study and Results Analysis 297 5.5.3 Performance Verification with On-site Data 302 5.6 A New Adaptive Method to Identify CT Saturation Using a Grille Fractal 304 5.6.1 Analysis of the Behaviour of CT Transient Saturation 304 5.6.2 The Basic Principle and Algorithm of Grille Fractal 308 5.6.3 Self-Adaptive Generalized Morphological Filter 312 5.6.4 The Design of Protection Program and the Verification of Results 313 5.7 Summary 317 References 317 Index 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisA top-down approach that enables readers to master and apply core principles Using an innovative top-down approach, this text makes it possible for readers to master and apply the principles of contemporary power electronics and electromechanic power conversion, exploring both systems and individual components.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi 1 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND POWER CONVERSION 1 1.1 Electricity as an Energy Carrier 1 1.2 Development of Electrical Energy Conversion Systems 4 1.3 System Building Blocks 6 1.4 Guide to the Book 7 1.4.1 Generation, Storage and Consumption of Electricity 8 1.4.2 Power Transfer and Matching of Loads and Sources 8 1.4.3 Electromechanics 9 1.4.4 Power Electronics 9 Problems 9 2 ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES AND ENERGY STORAGE 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Primary Sources 12 2.2.1 Centralised Sources 12 2.2.2 Decentralised Sources 17 2.3 Secondary Sources 20 2.3.1 Basic Concepts 20 2.3.2 Storage as Chemical Energy—Hydrogen 23 2.3.3 Storage as Electrochemical Energy 23 2.3.4 Storage as Electrical Energy 25 2.3.5 Storage as Mechanical Energy 26 2.4 Highlights 29 Problems 30 3 POWER, REACTIVE POWER AND POWER FACTOR 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Power in DC Circuits 36 3.3 Power in Resistive AC Circuits 38 3.4 Effective or rms Values 39 3.5 Phasor Representation 41 3.6 Power in AC Circuits 45 3.6.1 Power in a Capacitive Circuit 46 3.7 Apparent Power, Real Power and Power Factor 49 3.8 Complex Power 50 3.9 Electrical Energy Cost and Power Factor Correction 52 3.10 Fourier Series 56 3.11 Harmonics in Power Systems 60 3.12 Power and Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 61 3.13 Effective or rms Value of Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 65 3.14 Power Factor of Non-Sinusoidal Waveforms 66 3.15 Harmonics in Power Systems 70 3.16 Three-Phase Systems 73 3.17 Harmonics in Balanced Three-Phase Systems 75 3.18 Highlights 77 Problems 80 Further Reading 82 4 MAGNETICALLY COUPLED NETWORKS 85 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Basic Concepts 85 4.2.1 Ampère’s Circuital Law 86 4.2.2 Faraday’s Induction Law 87 4.2.3 Relationship between Magnetic Flux and Magnetic Field Strength 89 4.2.4 Inductance 93 4.2.5 Basic Magnetic Circuits 95 4.2.6 Magnetic Circuit with an Air Gap 99 4.3 Mutual Inductance 101 4.3.1 Simple Air-Core Transformer 103 4.3.2 Leakage Flux and the Transformer Core 104 4.4 Ideal Transformer 112 4.4.1 Referral of an Impedance 113 4.4.2 Leakage and Magnetising Inductances 114 4.5 Highlights 118 Problems 120 Further Reading 121 5 DYNAMICS OF ROTATIONAL SYSTEMS 123 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Preliminaries 124 5.3 Rotational Dynamics 127 5.3.1 Torque 127 5.3.2 Angular Displacement, Speed and Acceleration 128 5.3.3 Equations of Rotational Motion 129 5.3.4 Moment of Inertia 129 5.3.5 Rotating System 130 5.4 Coupling Mechanisms 133 5.4.1 Belt and Pulley 134 5.4.2 Gears 136 5.5 Highlights 138 Problems 140 Further Reading 140 6 POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS 141 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Linear Voltage Regulator 142 6.3 Switched Approach 145 6.4 Basic Assumptions 150 6.4.1 Switching Components 150 6.4.2 Linear Components 150 6.5 Buck Converter 152 6.5.1 State I 153 6.5.2 State II 154 6.5.3 Combining the Two States 154 6.5.4 Simplified Analysis Approach 155 6.5.5 What if vc(t) ≠ Vc? 157 6.6 Discontinious Conduction Mode 162 6.6.1 Boundary between CCM and DCM 162 6.6.2 Relationship between Vs and Vc in DCM 164 6.7 Other Basic Converter Structures 169 6.7.1 Boost Converter 169 6.7.2 Buck–Boost Converter 171 6.8 DC–DC Converters with Isolation 172 6.8.1 Coupled Inductor Isolation: Flyback 173 6.8.2 Transformer Isolation: Half-bridge 178 6.8.3 Transformer Isolation: Full-bridge 182 6.9 Highlights 187 Problems 189 Further Reading 193 7 SIMPLE ELECTRICAL MACHINES 195 7.1 Introduction 195 7.2 Motional Voltage and Electromagnetic Force 196 7.2.1 Conductor Moving in a Uniform Magnetic Field 196 7.2.2 Current-Carrying Conductor in a Uniform Magnetic Field 201 7.2.3 Right-Hand Rule 204 7.3 Simple Linear DC Machine 204 7.3.1 Starting of the Linear DC Motor 206 7.3.2 Linear DC Machine Operating as a Motor 207 7.3.3 Linear DC Machine Operating as a Generator 208 7.3.4 Electrical Equivalent Circuit of the Linear DC Machine 209 7.3.5 Mechanical Equivalent Circuit of the Linear DC Machine 211 7.3.6 A Practical Example: The Railgun 211 7.4 Basic Operation of the DC Machine 214 7.4.1 Induced Voltage 214 7.4.2 Mechanical Voltage Rectification 217 7.4.3 Force and Torque 219 7.4.4 Power Balance between Mechanical and Electrical Power 221 7.4.5 The benefit of a Uniform Air Gap 223 7.5 Practical DC Machine Construction 224 7.5.1 Induced Voltage in a Real DC Machine 225 7.5.2 Torque Produced in a Real DC Machine 227 7.6 Practical DC Machine Configurations 231 7.6.1 Permanent Magnet DC Machine 234 7.6.2 Field Winding DC Machines 240 7.6.3 Losses 244 7.7 DC Machine as a Component in a System 246 7.8 Highlights 248 Problems 250 Further Reading 252 8 AC MACHINES 253 8.1 Introduction 253 8.2 Three-Phase AC Electrical Port 253 8.3 AC Machine Stator 256 8.3.1 Rotating Magnetic Field 257 8.3.2 Reversing the Direction of Rotation 260 8.3.3 Increasing the Number of Poles 261 8.3.4 Flux Created in the Air Gap 262 8.3.5 Induced Voltage in Three-Phase Stator Windings 266 8.3.6 Increasing the Number of Poles 268 8.3.7 Changing the Magnitude of the Induced Voltage 269 8.4 Synchronous Machine 271 8.4.1 The Equivalent Circuit 273 8.4.2 Phasor Diagram 275 8.4.3 Power Angle Characteristic Equation 276 8.4.4 Controlling the Power Factor 278 8.5 Induction Machine 281 8.5.1 Induced Currents in the Induction Machine Rotor 281 8.5.2 Development of an Equivalent Circuit 287 8.5.3 Measurement of the Induction Machine Parameters 291 8.5.4 Performance Calculations 293 8.5.5 Induction Motor as a Component in a System 297 8.6 Highlights 299 Problems 302 Further Reading 304 INDEX 305

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith an emphasis on antennas and propagation, Radio Propagation and Adaptive Antennas investigates every aspect of wireless communication network design and function. The book delves into, among other applicable radio propagation topics, multipath phenomena, slow and fast fading, free-space propagation, and obstructed reflection and diffraction.Table of ContentsPreface vii Part I Fundamentals of Wireless Links and Networks 1 Wireless Communication Links with Fading 1 2 Antenna Fundamentals 34 3 Fundamentals of Wireless Networks 54 Part II Fundamentals of Radio Propagation 4 Electromagnetic Aspects of Wave Propagation over Terrain 81 5 Terrestrial Radio Communications 117 6 Indoor Radio Propagation 179 Part III Fundamentals of Adaptive Antennas 7 Adaptive Antennas for Wireless Networks 216 8 Prediction of Signal Distribution in Space, Time, and Frequency Domains in Radio Channels for Adaptive Antenna Applications 280 9 Prediction of Operational Characteristics of Adaptive Antennas 375 Part IV Practical Aspects of Terrestrial Networks Performance: Cellular and Noncellular 10 Multipath Fading Phenomena in Terrestrial Wireless Communication Links 413 11 Cellular and Noncellular Communication Networks Design Based on Radio Propagation Phenomena 494 Part V Atmospheric and Satellite Communication Links and Networks 12 Effects of the Troposphere on Radio Propagation 536 13 Ionospheric Radio Propagation 591 14 Land–Satellite Communication Links 639 Index 677

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on basic skills and tips for career enhancement, Engineer Your Own Success is a guide to improving efficiency and performance in any engineering field. It imparts valuable organization tips, communication advice, networking tactics, and practical assistance for preparing for the PE examevery necessary skill for success. Authored by a highly renowned career coach, this book is a battle plan for climbing the rungs of any engineering ladder.Table of ContentsA Note From The Series Editor xiii Acknowledgments xv Foreword xvii Preface xix Introduction: Use This Book Strategically 1 PART I YOUR GUIDE TO ENGINEERING A SUCCESSFUL JOB SEARCH 3 1 Building a Winning Résumé 5 1.1 Building a Winning Résumé (Online and Offline) 5 1.2 There Is One Key Factor to a Great Résumé 6 1.3 The Importance of Customizing Your Résumé 6 1.4 There Is a Formula to Building a Winning Résumé 7 1.5 Determining the Proper Length of a Résumé 8 1.6 Effectively Show Non-engineering Experience on Your Résumé 12 1.7 The Importance of Honesty During the Interview Process 13 1.8 Seven Steps to Creating a LinkedIn Profile That Can Land a Job 14 1.9 Your LinkedIn Profile and Your Résumé Should Be Perfect Professional Snapshots 16 1.10 Key Points to Remember 18 2 Landing and Acing an Engineering Job Interview 19 2.1 Leverage LinkedIn Groups to Land a Job Interview 19 2.2 Understanding Prospective Employers and Their Needs 20 2.3 Interview Research and Preparation 22 2.4 Interview Etiquette and Attire 23 2.5 Performing During the Actual Interview 24 2.6 The Follow-Up to the Interview 25 2.7 Jobs Can Affect Your PE License 26 2.8 Key Points to Remember 26 Part II THE 7 KEY ELEMENTS TO AN EXTRAORDINARY ENGINEERING CAREER 29 3 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.1 Career Goals Act as Your Destination 31 3.2 Start by Defining “Success” 32 3.3 Define Your Values 33 3.4 Ask Yourself Where Why What How and Who 34 3.5 More on Why 35 3.6 Think Big and Then Think BIGGER! 36 3.7 Formulate and Prioritize Your Goals 37 3.8 Be SMART and Use Small Steps for Big Results 37 3.9 Let Your Definition of Success Guide You 40 3.10 Motivate Yourself to Pursue Your Goals 41 3.11 Time to Celebrate! 42 3.12 Key Points to Remember 42 4 Obtain Credentials That Will Help You to Reach Your Goals 45 4.1 Credentials Bring You Credibility 45 4.2 Set Yourself Apart from Others 46 4.3 Recognizing the Difference between Patience and Procrastination 47 4.4 Exam Preparation: Start With the End in Mind 48 4.5 Tips for Approaching the PE Exam 49 4.5.1 Take the Fundamentals of Engineering Exam as Soon as Possible 49 4.5.2 Start the PE Exam Application Process as Early as Possible 50 4.5.3 Submit the Application as Soon as Possible 51 4.5.4 Don’t Take the Exam Just to See What It Contains 51 4.5.5 Take a Review Course Whether You Want to or Not 52 4.5.6 Ask Others What Worked for Them 52 4.5.7 Bring the Right Materials to the Exam 53 4.5.8 The Day of the Exam 54 4.5.9 The Day After the Exam 55 4.5.10 Credentialing Processes around the World 55 4.6 If You Fall Off the Horse Get Right Back On 55 4.7 Master’s in Engineering or Business Administration? 56 4.8 Awards Are Underrated 58 4.9 Take Advantage of Company Benefits 58 4.10 Key Points to Remember 59 5 Find and Become a Mentor 61 5.1 The Many Faces of a Mentor 61 5.2 Finding a Mentoring Program and Selecting the Right Mentor 62 5.2.1 Try to Select Someone from Your Specific Discipline 63 5.2.2 Consider Your Level of Comfort 64 5.2.3 Don’t Settle on the First One That Comes Along 64 5.3 The Mentoring Relationship for Protégés 64 5.3.1 Establish Levels of Confidentiality 65 5.3.2 Set Expectations for Mutual Accountability 65 5.4 The Importance of Accountability 66 5.5 Getting the Most from Your Mentor 67 5.6 Become a Mentor 67 5.7 Selecting the Right Protégé 68 5.8 Being the Best Mentor You Can Be 69 5.9 How to Graciously End a Mentoring Relationship 70 5.10 Actions to Avoid for Mentors and Protégés 71 5.11 Key Points to Remember 71 6 Become a Great Communicator 73 6.1 In Today’s World Communication Is a Whole Different Ball Game 73 6.2 Project/Team Communication Starts In House 74 6.3 Communicate Early and Often 75 6.4 How to (Almost) Explain Rocket Science to a Nontechnical Person 76 6.5 Honesty Really Is the Best Policy 77 6.6 How You Say Something Is Just as Important as What You Say 79 6.7 Public Speaking: The Ultimate Differentiator 80 6.8 How to Improve Your Public Speaking Skills 82 6.9 Confidence Encourages Communication 84 6.10 Sometimes Listening Is the Most Powerful Form of Communication 85 6.11 Responsiveness Impacts Reputation 86 6.12 Key Points to Remember 87 7 The Ability to Network 89 7.1 What Is Networking and Why Is It Important? 89 7.2 Secrets to Building Lasting Relationships 90 7.2.1 Their Interests Should Interest You 91 7.2.2 Listen to Others 91 7.2.3 Relationship Value Is a Two-Way Street 92 7.3 Network in Your Industry through Professional Societies and Organizations 92 7.4 Finding and Developing Project Leads Gets You Noticed 94 7.5 Opportunities Have No Limits 96 7.6 You Are Never Too Young (or Old!) to Network 97 7.7 Overcoming Low Confidence and Language Barriers 98 7.8 How to Deal with a Boss or Supervisor Who Is Holding You Back 99 7.9 Interoffice Politics and Workplace Relationships 101 7.10 Monitoring and Controlling Your Professional Image in Social Networking 102 7.10.1 Controlling Your Facebook Twitter and Google+ Messaging 102 7.10.2 Maximizing LinkedIn 103 7.11 Key Points to Remember 104 8 Stay Focused Organized Productive and Stress-Free 107 8.1 The Three Rules to Time Management and Work–Family Balance 107 8.2 Rule #1: Be Organized in All of Your Efforts 108 8.2.1 Deploy a Minimalist Mind-Set 109 8.2.2 Use the Old (and New) Trusty Notepad 110 8.2.3 Manage the Never-Ending Pile of Business Cards 112 8.2.4 Remember That Missed Appointments Equal Missed Opportunities 114 8.2.4.1 Use Your Calendar Religiously 114 8.2.4.2 Fill in All Pertinent Information 114 8.2.4.3 Confirm All Meetings 115 8.2.5 Avoid the “I Am Not Sure What Color My Desk Is” Syndrome 115 8.2.6 Prepare for Your Annual Performance Review 116 8.3 Rule #2: Stay Focused and Productive 118 8.3.1 Create Consistency through Routines 118 8.3.2 Establish Your Most Important Tasks Early Each Day 119 8.3.3 Complete or Assign Your MITs First Thing Each Day 120 8.3.4 Control Your Own Schedule by Breaking Bad E-Mail Habits 121 8.3.5 Slow Things Down through Meditation 123 8.3.6 Focus Intently on What You Are Doing 123 8.4 Rule #3: Avoid Stress and Worry at All Costs 124 8.4.1 Simplification through Elimination 125 8.4.2 Empty Your E-Mail Inbox Twice per Day 125 8.4.3 A Good To-Do List Can Work Wonders 126 8.4.4 Keep Your Body (and Mind) in Shape 128 8.4.5 Eat and Sleep Well 129 8.5 Work–Family Balance Is Achievable 130 8.5.1 Define Work–Family Balance 130 8.5.2 Build Flexibility into Your Career 131 8.5.3 Be Present in the Moment 132 8.6 Key Points to Remember 133 9 Be a Leader Every Day 135 9.1 You Are a Leader 135 9.2 The Power of Positivity 136 9.3 Great Leaders See Only Opportunity 137 9.4 Understanding Your Role 139 9.5 Delegate Delegate and Then Delegate Some More 140 9.6 Earn the Trust and Respect of Your Team 142 9.7 There Is No “I” in Team 143 9.8 Key Points to Remember 144 10 The Time Is Now: Take Action 147 10.1 The Time Is Now 147 10.2 Do Not Settle for Less 148 10.3 You Must Make Time for Your Own Development 148 10.4 Think Like an Entrepreneur in Your Career 149 10.5 Take Action 150 10.6 Key Points to Remember 150 11 Tools and Templates for Setting and Achieving Your Career Goals 153 11.1 Template for a Winning Résumé 154 11.2 Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your Values 155 11.3A Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in One Year 155 11.3B Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Two Years 156 11.3C Action Exercise Worksheet—Define Your End Results in Five Years 157 11.4 Action Exercise Worksheet—Formulate and Prioritize Goals 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #1 158 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #2 159 11.5 Action Exercise Worksheet—SMART Process to Achieve Goal #3 160 11.6 Action Exercise Worksheet 161 11.7 Action Exercise Worksheet 162 11.8 Action Exercise Worksheet 163 12 Engineering Your Own Success Stories from Practicing Engineers 165 12.1 Planning to Be an Extraordinary Engineer 165 12.2 Realizing a Dream of Becoming a Structural Engineer 166 12.3 A Big Step Forward for an Aspiring World-Class Engineer 167 12.4 A Boost of Confidence to Spur Maximum Potential 168 12.5 The Push Needed to Take Action 169 12.6 I Decided to Start Planning for Me in My Career 170 13 The Best of the Blog 171 13.1 What Is Your Ultimate Career Goal? (September 10 2010) 171 13.2 From Design Engineer to Manager in 2012: You Can Do It! (January 4 2012) 172 13.3 Twelve Rules of Zen Monks That May Help You Reduce Stress and Improve Quality in Your Engineering Career (June 5 2012) 174 13.4 It’s My Birthday! Who I Am Away from Work and Important Lessons That I Have Learned (August 26 2012) 176 13.5 What to Do in Your Engineering Career When You Don’t Know What to Do (May 30 2013) 178 13.6 Preparation Is Key to Engineering Balance in Your Career and Life (July 25 2013) 179 13.7 Six Ways to Reinvigorate Your Engineering Career Development (July 31 2013) 181 13.8 The Only Stability You Have in Your Engineering Career Is You (September 24 2013) 182 13.9 Be Cautious Even When You Find One of the Highest-Paying Engineering Jobs (August 15 2013) 184 13.10 If You Set Lofty Goals You Will Engineer Their Reality (October 22 2013) 185 13.11 Seven Keys to Success for Engineers and Alaskan Sled Dogs (November 14 2013) 187 13.12 Do All Engineers Need to Check Things Off to Feel Productive? (December 11 2013) 188 13.13 How to Not Mess Up Your Annual Review for Engineers (December 24 2013) 189 13.14 Three Steps to Becoming a Partner in an Engineering Firm Directly from an Engineering Partner (February 5 2014) 191 Appendix: Recommended Reading 193 About the Author 199 Index 201

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores and identifies the main issues, concepts, principles and evolution of software testing, including software quality engineering and testing concepts, test data generation, test deployment analysis, and software test managementThis book examines the principles, concepts, and processes that are fundamental to the software testing function. This book is divided into five broad parts. Part I introduces software testing in the broader context of software engineering and explores the qualities that testing aims to achieve or ascertain, as well as the lifecycle of software testing. Part II covers mathematical foundations of software testing, which include software specification, program correctness and verification, concepts of software dependability, and a software testing taxonomy. Part III discusses test data generation, specifically, functional criteria and structural criteria. Test oracle design, test driver design, and test outcome analysis is covered in PaTable of ContentsPreface xiv Part I Introduction to Software Testing 1 1 Software Engineering: A Discipline Like No Other 3 1.1 A Young, Restless Discipline 3 1.2 An Industry Under Stress 5 1.3 Large, Complex Products 5 1.4 Expensive Products 7 1.5 Absence of Reuse Practice 9 1.6 Fault-Prone Designs 9 1.7 Paradoxical Economics 10 1.7.1 A Labor-Intensive Industry 10 1.7.2 Absence of Automation 11 1.7.3 Limited Quality Control 11 1.7.4 Unbalanced Lifecycle Costs 12 1.7.5 Unbalanced Maintenance Costs 12 1.8 Chapter Summary 13 1.9 Bibliographic Notes 13 2 Software Quality Attributes 14 2.1 Functional Attributes 15 2.1.1 Boolean Attributes 15 2.1.2 Statistical Attributes 15 2.2 Operational Attributes 17 2.3 Usability Attributes 18 2.4 Business Attributes 19 2.5 Structural Attributes 20 2.6 Chapter Summary 21 2.7 Exercises 21 2.8 Bibliographic Notes 22 3 A Software Testing Lifecycle 23 3.1 A Software Engineering Lifecycle 23 3.2 A Software Testing Lifecycle 27 3.3 The V-Model of Software Testing 32 3.4 Chapter Summary 33 3.5 Bibliographic Notes 34 Part II Foundations of Software Testing 35 4 Software Specifications 37 4.1 Principles of Sound Specification 38 4.1.1 A Discipline of Specification 38 4.2 Relational Mathematics 39 4.2.1 Sets and Relations 39 4.2.2 Operations on Relations 39 4.2.3 Properties of Relations 41 4.3 Simple Input Output Programs 42 4.3.1 Representing Specifications 42 4.3.2 Ordering Specifications 46 4.3.3 Specification Generation 48 4.3.4 Specification Validation 53 4.4 Reliability Versus Safety 60 4.5 State-based Systems 61 4.5.1 A Relational Model 62 4.5.2 Axiomatic Representation 64 4.5.3 Specification Validation 70 4.6 Chapter Summary 72 4.7 Exercises 72 4.8 Problems 76 4.9 Bibliographic Notes 78 5 Program Correctness and Verification 79 5.1 Correctness: A Definition 80 5.2 Correctness: Propositions 83 5.2.1 Correctness and Refinement 83 5.2.2 Set Theoretic Characterizations 85 5.2.3 Illustrations 86 5.3 Verification 88 5.3.1 Sample Formulas 89 5.3.2 An Inference System 91 5.3.3 Illustrative Examples 94 5.4 Chapter Summary 98 5.5 Exercises 99 5.6 Problems 100 5.7 Bibliographic Notes 100 6 Failures, Errors, and Faults 101 6.1 Failure, Error, and Fault 101 6.2 Faults and Relative Correctness 103 6.2.1 Fault, an Evasive Concept 103 6.2.2 Relative Correctness 104 6.3 Contingent Faults and Definite Faults 107 6.3.1 Contingent Faults 107 6.3.2 Monotonic Fault Removal 109 6.3.3 A Framework for Monotonic Fault Removal 114 6.3.4 Definite Faults 114 6.4 Fault Management 116 6.4.1 Lines of Defense 116 6.4.2 Hybrid Validation 118 6.5 Chapter Summary 121 6.6 Exercises 122 6.7 Problems 123 6.8 Bibliographic Notes 124 7 A Software Testing Taxonomy 125 7.1 The Trouble with Hyphenated Testing 125 7.2 A Classification Scheme 126 7.2.1 Primary Attributes 127 7.2.2 Secondary Attributes 131 7.3 Testing Taxonomy 136 7.3.1 Unit-Level Testing 136 7.3.2 System-Level Testing 138 7.4 Exercises 139 7.5 Bibliographic Notes 140 Part III Test Data Generation 141 8 Test Generation Concepts 143 8.1 Test Generation and Target Attributes 143 8.2 Test Outcomes 146 8.3 Test Generation Requirements 148 8.4 Test Generation Criteria 152 8.5 Empirical Adequacy Assessment 155 8.6 Chapter Summary 160 8.7 Exercises 161 8.8 Bibliographic Notes 162 8.9 Appendix: Mutation Program 163 9 Functional Criteria 165 9.1 Domain Partitioning 165 9.2 Test Data Generation from Tabular Expressions 171 9.3 Test Generation for State Based Systems 176 9.4 Random Test Data Generation 184 9.5 Tourism as a Metaphor for Test Data Selection 188 9.6 Chapter Summary 190 9.7 Exercises 190 9.8 Bibliographic Notes 192 10 Structural Criteria 193 10.1 Paths and Path Conditions 194 10.1.1 Execution Paths 194 10.1.2 Path Functions 196 10.1.3 Path Conditions 201 10.2 Control Flow Coverage 202 10.2.1 Statement Coverage 202 10.2.2 Branch Coverage 204 10.2.3 Condition Coverage 207 10.2.4 Path Coverage 209 10.3 Data Flow Coverage 214 10.3.1 Definitions and Uses 214 10.3.2 Test Generation Criteria 217 10.3.3 A Hierarchy of Criteria 220 10.4 Fault-Based Test Generation 220 10.4.1 Sensitizing Faults 221 10.4.2 Selecting Input Data for Fault Sensitization 225 10.4.3 Selecting Input Data for Error Propagation 227 10.5 Chapter Summary 228 10.6 Exercises 229 10.7 Bibliographic Notes 232 Part IV Test Deployment and Analysis 233 11 Test Oracle Design 235 11.1 Dilemmas of Oracle Design 235 11.2 From Specifications to Oracles 238 11.3 Oracles for State-Based Products 242 11.3.1 From Axioms to Oracles 243 11.3.2 From Rules to Oracles 244 11.4 Chapter Summary 250 11.5 Exercises 251 12 Test Driver Design 253 12.1 Selecting a Specification 253 12.2 Selecting a Process 255 12.3 Selecting a Specification Model 257 12.3.1 Random Test Generation 257 12.3.2 Pre-Generated Test Data 263 12.3.3 Faults and Fault Detection 266 12.4 Testing by Symbolic Execution 269 12.5 Chapter Summary 274 12.6 Exercises 275 12.7 Bibliographic Notes 279 13 Test Outcome Analysis 280 13.1 Logical Claims 281 13.1.1 Concrete Testing 281 13.1.2 Symbolic Testing 282 13.1.3 Concolic Testing 283 13.2 Stochastic Claims: Fault Density 284 13.3 Stochastic Claims: Failure Probability 287 13.3.1 Faults are Not Created Equal 287 13.3.2 Defining/Quantifying Reliability 289 13.3.3 Modeling Software Reliability 291 13.3.4 Certification Testing 294 13.3.5 Reliability Estimation and Reliability Improvement 295 13.3.6 Reliability Standards 299 13.3.7 Reliability as an Economic Function 300 13.4 Chapter Summary 307 13.5 Exercises 308 13.6 Problems 310 13.7 Bibliographic Notes 310 Part V Management of Software Testing 311 14 Metrics for Software Testing 313 14.1 Fault Proneness 314 14.1.1 Cyclomatic Complexity 315 14.1.2 Volume 316 14.2 Fault Detectability 317 14.3 Error Detectability 320 14.4 Error Maskability 323 14.5 Failure Avoidance 324 14.6 Failure Tolerance 326 14.7 An Illustrative Example 327 14.7.1 Cyclomatic Complexity 327 14.7.2 Volume 328 14.7.3 State Redundancy 328 14.7.4 Functional Redundancy 328 14.7.5 Non-injectivity 329 14.7.6 Non-determinacy 329 14.7.7 Summary 330 14.8 Chapter Summary 330 14.9 Exercises 331 14.10 Bibliographic Notes 332 15 Software Testing Tools 333 15.1 A Classification Scheme 333 15.2 Scripting Tools 334 15.2.1 CppTest 334 15.2.2 SilkTest 335 15.3 Record-and-Replay Tools 336 15.3.1 TestComplete 336 15.3.2 Selenium IDE 337 15.4 Performance-Testing Tools 338 15.4.1 LoadRunner 338 15.4.2 Grinder 339 15.4.3 QF-Test 340 15.4.4 Appvance PerformanceCloud 340 15.4.5 JMeter 341 15.5 Oracle Design Tools 342 15.5.1 JUnit 342 15.5.2 TestNG 343 15.6 Exception Discovery 343 15.6.1 Rational Purify 343 15.6.2 Astree 344 15.7 Collaborative Tools 345 15.7.1 FitNesse 345 15.8 Chapter Summary 345 16 Testing Product Lines 347 16.1 PLE: A Streamlined Reuse Model 347 16.2 Testing Issues 351 16.3 Testing Approaches 353 16.4 Illustration 354 16.4.1 Domain Analysis 354 16.4.2 Domain Modeling 356 16.4.3 A Reference Architecture 359 16.4.4 Domain Implementation 360 16.4.5 Testing at Domain Engineering 365 16.4.6 Testing at Application Engineering 369 16.5 Chapter Summary 372 16.6 Exercises 372 16.7 Problems 372 16.8 Bibliographic References 373 Bibliography 374 Index 377

Read more less